Renault SCENIC
Driver’s handbook
A passion
for
performance
ELF, partner of
RENAULT recommends ELF
Partners in cutting-edge automotive technology, Elf and Renault combine their expertise on both
the racetrack and the city streets. This enduring partnership gives drivers a range of lubricants
perfectly suited to Renault cars. Lasting protection and optimum performance for your engine –
guaranteed. Whether changing the oil or simply topping up, to find the approved ELF lubricant
best suited to your vehicle, ask your Renault dealer for a recommendation or consult your vehi-
cle maintenance handbook.
www.lubricants.elf.com
A brand from
2016-Elf-ENG.indd 1
18/05/2016 14:20
0.1
Translated from French. Copying or translation, in part or in full, is forbidden unless prior written permission has been obtained from the vehicle manu-
facturer.
This Driver’s Handbook contains the information necessary:
– for you to familiarise yourself with your vehicle, to use it to its best advantage and to benefit fully from the all the functions and
the technical developments it incorporates.
– to ensure that it always gives the best performance by following the simple, but comprehensive advice concerning regular main-
tenance.
– to enable you to deal quickly with minor faults not requiring specialist attention.
It is well worth taking a few minutes to read this handbook to familiarise yourself with the information and guidelines it contains
about the vehicle and its functions and new features. If certain points are still unclear, our Network technicians will be only too
pleased to provide you with any additional information.
The following symbol will help you when reading this handbook:
Welcome to your new vehicle
The descriptions of the models given in this handbook are based on the technical specifications at the time of writing. This hand-
book covers all items of equipment (both standard and optional) available for these models but whether or not these are
fitted to the vehicle depends on the version, options selected and the country where the vehicle is sold.
This handbook may also contain information about items of equipment to be introduced later in the model year.
Throughout the manual, the “approved Dealer” is your RENAULT Dealer.
To indicate a hazard, danger or safety recommendation.
Enjoy driving your new vehicle.
0.2
0.3
Getting to know your vehicle ...............................
Driving ...................................................................
Your comfort .........................................................
Maintenance .........................................................
Practical advice ....................................................
Technical specifications ......................................
Alphabetical index ...............................................
Sections
1
CONTENTS
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.4
1.1
Section 1: Getting to know your vehicle
Key, radio frequency remote control: general information, use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
The RENAULT card: general information and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6
Locking, unlocking the opening elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Opening and closing the doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
Automatic locking when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18
Headrests - Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28
Additional methods of restraint: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32
in addition to the front seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32
to the rear seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.36
side protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37
Child safety: General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.39
choosing a child seat mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.42
Fitting a child seat, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.45
Child seats: attachment by seat belt or by Isofix system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.47
deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.59
Driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.62
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.66
trip computer and warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.78
vehicle settings customisation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.88
Clock and outdoor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.90
Steering wheel/Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.91
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.92
Audible and visual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.94
Exterior lighting and signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.95
Headlight beam adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.101
Windscreen wash/wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.102
Rear windscreen wash, wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.108
Fuel tank (filling with fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.110
1.2
KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information (1/2)
The key must not be used for any
function other than those described
in the handbook (removing the cap
from a bottle, etc.).
Advice
Avoid leaving the remote control in
hot, cold or humid areas.
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
4
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
5
1 Locks all the opening elements.
2 Unlocks all the opening elements.
3 Ignition and front door key.
5 Locking/unlocking the tailgate only.
Remote control with switchblade
key:
4 Locking/unlocking using the switch-
blade key. To release the insert from
its housing, press button 4, it comes
out automatically. Press button 4 and
guide the insert back into its housing.
1.3
KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information (2/2)
Radio frequency remote
control operating range
This varies according to the surround-
ings: take care not to lock or unlock the
doors by inadvertently pressing the but-
tons on the remote control.
Note: If a door or the boot is open or
not closed properly, the doors and boot
lock/unlock in quick succession.
Interference
Interference by factors in the immediate
vicinity (external installations or the use
of equipment operating on the same
frequency as the remote control) may
affect the operation of the remote con-
trol.
Replacement and additional keys
or remote controls.
You must only contact an approved
dealer:
– If you need to replace a key it will
be necessary to take the vehicle
and all of its keys to an approved
Dealer in order to initialise the
system.
– Depending on the vehicle, you
have the option of using up to
four remote controls.
Remote control unit failure
Make sure that the correct battery
type is being used, and that the
battery is in good condition and in-
serted correctly. These batteries
have a service life of approximately
two years.
Refer to Section 5: “Radio fre-
quency remote control: batteries”
for the battery changing procedure.
1.4
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT: use
Locking/unlocking only the
boot
Press the button 3.
The remote control A can be used to
lock or unlock the doors and boot.
It is powered by a battery which must
be replaced (refer to the information on
“Radio frequency remote control: bat-
teries” in Section 5).
Locking the doors
Press locking button 1.
The side indicator lights and hazard
warning lights flash twice to indicate
that the doors have been locked.
If a door or the boot is open or not prop-
erly shut, they will lock and unlock in
quick succession and the hazard warn-
ing lights and side indicator lights will
not flash.
Unlocking the doors
Pressing button 2 unlocks the doors
and tailgate.
Unlocking is indicated by one flash of
the hazard warning lights and the indi-
cator lights.
A
Note:
With the engine running, the ignition
switched on (refer to the information on
“Ignition switch: vehicles with a key” in
Section 2), the remote control buttons
will be inactive.
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on
your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside
the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
1
2
3
1
2
3
1.5
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT: deadlocking
Never use deadlocking if
someone is still inside the
vehicle.
If the vehicle is equipped with a dead-
locking function, this allows you to lock
the opening elements and to prevent
the doors from being unlocked using
the interior handles (for example, by
breaking the window and then trying to
open the door from the inside).
To do this, press button 1 twice in quick
succession.
The hazard warning lights and side in-
dicator lights give two slow flashes and
three quick flashes to indicate locking.
Special note: deadlocking is not pos-
sible if the hazard warning lights or the
side lights are lit.
1
1
1.6
RENAULT CARD: general information (1/2)
The RENAULT card is used
for:
– locking/unlocking the doors and tail-
gate (doors, tailgate) and the fuel
filler flap (see the following pages);
– switching on the vehicle lighting re-
motely (refer to the following pages);
– automatically closing the electric
windows remotely (see the informa-
tion on “Electric windows” in
Section 3);
– starting the engine (see the infor-
mation on “Starting, stopping the
engine” in Section 2).
Battery life
Make sure that the correct battery type
is being used, and that the battery is in
good condition and inserted correctly.
Its service life is approximately two
years: replace it when the message
“Keycard battery low” appears on the
instrument panel (refer to the informa-
tion on the “RENAULT card: battery” in
section 5).
RENAULT card operating
range
This varies according to the environ-
ment: take care not to accidentally lock
or unlock the vehicle by inadvertently
pressing the buttons on the RENAULT
card.
Note: if a door or the tailgate is open or
not closed properly, the doors and tail-
gate lock then unlock quickly.
Interference
Interference by factors in the immediate
vicinity (external installations or the use
of equipment operating on the same
frequency as the RENAULT card) may
disrupt its operation.
When the battery is flat, you can
still lock/unlock and start your vehi-
cle. Please see the information on
“Locking and unlocking the doors”
in Chapter 1 and “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Chapter 2.
1
2
3
4
1 Unlocking the doors and tailgate.
2 Locking all doors and tailgate.
3 Unlocking/locking the boot.
4 Switching on the lighting remotely.
1.7
RENAULT CARD: general information (2/2)
Advice
Avoid leaving the card in hot, cold or
humid areas.
Do not keep the RENAULT card in
a place where it could be bent or
damaged accidentally, such as in a
back pocket of a garment.
Replacement: need for an
additional RENAULT Card
If you lose your RENAULT card or
require another, you can obtain one
from an approved dealer.
If a RENAULT card is replaced, it
will be necessary to take the vehi-
cle and all of its RENAULT cards
to an approved dealer to initialise
the system.
You may use up to four RENAULT
cards per vehicle.
Distance lighting function
Pressing button 4 switches on the
dipped beam headlights and the interior
lighting for approximately 20 seconds.
This can be used, for example, to iden-
tify your vehicle from a distance when
parked in a car park.
Note: Pressing button 4 again switches
off the lighting.
4
Driver’s responsibility
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not
self-sufficient alone in your
vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.8
RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (1/4)
Do not store the RENAULT card
anywhere it may come into con-
tact with other electronic equipment
(computer, phone, etc.) as this could
hinder its operation.
Driver’s responsibility
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not
self-sufficient alone in your
vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
There are two ways to unlock/lock the
vehicle:
– the RENAULT card in “Hands-free”
mode;
– the RENAULT card in remote con-
trol mode.
1
Using the card in “hands-
free” mode
In “hands-free” mode, it is possible to
lock/unlock the vehicle without using
any of the RENAULT card’s buttons,
as long as the card is within the access
zone 1.
Note: It is possible to disable “hands-
free” access using the multifunction
screen (please see the equipment in-
structions).
1.9
RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (2/4)
“Hands-free” locking using the
sensor 3
If you wish to lock your vehicle while the
card is within range, make sure that the
doors and boot are closed and place
your finger over the sensor 3 on the
driver’s door handle. The vehicle will
lock.
Note: The sensor cannot be used to
lock the vehicle unless the RENAULT
card is within the access zone 1.
Special features of the locking
system
Having locked the vehicle by pressing
the sensor 3, there is a delay of ap-
proximately three seconds before it can
be unlocked again. During these three
seconds, the door handles can be tried
to make sure that the vehicle is locked
properly.
If a door is open or not properly closed:
– when locking using the sensor 3,
the vehicle will lock/unlock in quick
succession, but the hazard warning
lights and the side indicator lights will
not flash;
– the vehicle will not lock as you move
away.
3
Remote “Hands-free” locking
With the RENAULT card on you, and
doors and boot closed, move away
from the vehicle: it will lock automati-
cally as soon as you leave the access
zone.
Note: The distance at which the vehicle
locks depends on the surroundings.
To indicate that the vehicle has been
locked, the hazard warning lights
flash once and then light up for ap-
proximately four seconds, and a beep
sounds in confirmation.
4
“Hands-free” unlocking
With the RENAULT card in zone 1,
place your hand on a door handle 2: the
vehicle will unlock.
Unlocking is indicated by one flash of
the hazard warning lights and the indi-
cator lights.
Pressing the button 4 unlocks the entire
vehicle and releases the boot.
2
1.10
RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (3/4)
Particular features of the locking
system (continued)
If the RENAULT card has been within
range for approximately 15 minutes,
remote locking is disabled.
The vehicle cannot be locked if the card
is within the zone 5.
If the vehicle is unlocked by pressing
the button on the RENAULT card, but
the doors or boot are not then opened;
remote “hands-free” locking is disabled.
Using the card as a remote
control
Unlocking with the card RENAULT
Press button 6.
Unlocking is indicated by one flash of
the hazard warning lights and the indi-
cator lights.
Locking using the RENAULT card
With the doors and boot closed, press
button 7: the vehicle locks.
The indicator lights and hazard warning
lights flash twice to indicate that the
doors have locked.
Note: The maximum distance at which
the vehicle locks depends on the sur-
roundings.
Special features
If an opening element (a door or the
luggage compartment) is open or not
properly closed, the vehicle cannot be
locked. The vehicle will lock/unlock in
quick succession, but the hazard warn-
ing lights and the side indicator lights
will not flash.
6
7
5
The card buttons are deactivated
when the engine is running.
1.11
RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (4/4)
Locking/unlocking only the
boot
Press the button 8 to lock/unlock the
boot only.
If, while the engine is running, a door
is opened and closed, and the card is
no longer in the zone 5, the message
“Keycard not detected” indicates that
the card is not inside the vehicle. This
will, for example, prevent you from driv-
ing away after dropping off a passenger
who has kept the card on them.
The warning disappears when the card
is detected again.
5
8
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.12
Never use deadlocking if
someone is still inside the
vehicle.
If the vehicle is equipped with a dead-
locking function, this allows you to lock
the opening elements and to prevent
the doors from being unlocked using
the interior handles (for example, by
breaking the window and then trying to
open the door from the inside).
To do this, press button 1 twice in quick
succession.
The hazard warning lights and side in-
dicator lights give two slow flashes and
three quick flashes to indicate locking.
Special note: deadlocking is not pos-
sible if the hazard warning lights or the
side lights are lit.
RENAULT CARD: deadlocking
1
1.13
LOCKING/UNLOCKING THE DOORS (1/3)
The card’s built-in key
The built-in key 2 is used to lock or
unlock the front left-hand door if the
RENAULT card is not working.
Access with key 2
Slide the rear casing 1 downwards
while pressing on zone A.
2
A
1
If the remote control or,
depending on the vehicle, the
RENAULT card does not work
In some cases, the radio frequency
remote control or the RENAULT card
may not work:
– RENAULT card/radio frequency
remote control battery worn or run
flat, vehicle battery flat, etc.
– use of appliances operating on the
same frequency as the card (mobile
phone, etc.);
– vehicle located in a high electromag-
netic radiation zone.
It is then possible:
– depending on the vehicle, use the
radio frequency remote control or
the emergency key integrated in the
card to unlock the front left-hand
door;
– to lock each of the doors manually;
– to use the interior door locking/un-
locking control (refer to the following
pages).
1.14
LOCKING/UNLOCKING THE DOORS (2/3)
6
Locking the doors manually
Turn screw 6 with the door open (using
the end of the key) and close the door.
This means that the doors are then
locked from the outside.
The doors may then only be opened
from the inside or by using the key in
the front left-hand door.
B
3
2
Using the key integrated in the
RENAULT card
– Insert the tip of the key 2 into the
notch 3 at the bottom of the cover B
on the front left-hand door;
– Move it upwards to remove the
cover B;
– Insert the key 2 into the lock and lock
or unlock the front left-hand door.
Once you are inside the vehicle, put the
key back in its casing in the RENAULT
card.
5
4
Vehicles with key/remote
control
Using the key
Insert the key 5 into the lock 4 and lock
or unlock the front left-hand door.
1.15
LOCKING/UNLOCKING THE DOORS (3/3)
7
Interior locking/unlocking
door control
Switch 7 controls the doors, the boot
and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.
If a door or the tailgate is open or not
closed properly, the doors and tailgate
lock/unlock quickly.
If transporting an object with the tail-
gate open, you can still lock the doors:
with the engine stopped, press and
hold switch 7 for more than five sec-
onds to lock the other doors.
Locking the opening
elements without the
RENAULT card or the key
For example, in the event of a dis-
charged battery or the RENAULT card
or key temporarily not working, etc.
With the engine switched off and a
door or tailgate open, press and hold
switch 7 for more than five seconds.
When the door is closed, all the doors
and the tailgate will be locked.
Unlocking the vehicle from the outside
is only possible with the RENAULT card
in the vehicle’s access zone or using
the key.
Door and tailgate status
indicator
When the ignition is on, the indicator
light integrated in switch 7 informs you
of the status of the doors and tailgate:
– indicator light on, the doors and tail-
gate are locked;
– indicator light off, the doors and tail-
gate are unlocked.
When you lock the doors from the out-
side, the indicator light remains lit for a
moment, and then goes out.
Never leave your vehicle
with the key or RENAULT
card inside.
Driver’s responsibility
If you decide to keep the
doors locked when you are
driving, remember that it
may be more difficult for those as-
sisting you to gain access to the
passenger compartment in the
event of an emergency.
1.16
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (1/2)
Opening the doors from the
outside
With the doors unlocked or RENAULT
card on you, hold handle 1 and pull it
towards you.
Opening from the inside
Pull on the handle 2.
Lights-on reminder buzzer
If you have switched off the ignition
and left the lights switched on, a remin-
der buzzer will sound when a door is
opened while the light stalk is not in po-
sition AUTO.
2
As a safety precaution,
the doors should only be
opened or closed when the
vehicle is stationary.
1
4
3
Door/tailgate open buzzer
At a standstill, warning light 3 lights
up on the instrument panel alongside
warning light 4, indicating the opening
element(s) (door, boot) open or incor-
rectly closed.
Once the vehicle reaches a speed of
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), a
warning light indicates if the door(s) or
luggage compartment are open or im-
properly closed, along with the mes-
sage “Boot open” or “Door open” and a
beep will sound for around 40 seconds
or until the door/luggage compartment
is closed.
1.17
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (2/2)
Child safety
Move lever 5 and check from the inside
that the doors are securely locked, to
prevent the rear doors being opened
from the inside.
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
5
1.18
AUTOMATIC LOCKING WHEN DRIVING
Operating principle
After the vehicle is started, the system
automatically locks the doors when you
are driving at approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) and over.
The door can be unlocked:
– by pressing central door unlocking
switch 2.
– at a standstill, by opening a front
door from inside the vehicle.
Note: if a door is opened or closed, it
will automatically lock again when the
vehicle reaches a speed of 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Activating/deactivating the
function
To switch it on: with the vehicle at a
standstill and the engine running, press
switch 2 until a beep sounds.
To deactivate: with the vehicle station-
ary and the engine running, press the
switch 2 until you hear two beeps.
You can also deactivate/activate the
function from the menu on the multi-
function screen 1 (refer to the informa-
tion on the “Vehicle settings customisa-
tion menu” section 1, “Auto door locking
while driving” function).
Operating faults
If you experience an operating fault (no
automatic locking, the indicator light in-
corporated in switch 2 does not light up
when trying to lock the doors and boot,
etc.), make sure that locking has not
been deactivated by mistake and check
that the doors and boot are properly
closed. If they are correctly locked and
the fault is still present, contact an au-
thorised dealer.
2
Driver’s responsibility
If you decide to keep the
doors locked when you are
driving, remember that it
may be more difficult for those as-
sisting you to gain access to the
passenger compartment in the
event of an emergency.
1
1.19
FRONT HEADRESTS
The headrest is an impor-
tant safety component:
ensure that it is in place and
in the correct position. The
distance between your head and the
headrest and the distance between
the head and section A should be
as small as possible.
To raise the headrest
Pull the headrest upwards to the de-
sired height.
To lower the headrest
Press button 2 and guide the headrest
down to the desired height.
To adjust the angle of the
headrest
Depending on the vehicle, move sec-
tion A towards or away from you to the
required position.
To adjust side supports B
Depending on the vehicle, sections B
can be adjusted independently to the
desired position.
To remove the headrest
Raise it to its highest position (tilt the
seatback backwards if necessary).
Press button 2 and lift the headrest to
release it.
To refit the headrest
Check that the headrest rods are
clean 3.
Insert the headrest rods into the holes 1
(tilt the seatback backwards if neces-
sary).
Lower the headrest until it locks, press
button 2 and lower the headrest as far
as it will go.
Check that the headrest is properly
locked in place.
B
A
B
2
3
1
1.20
FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (1/3)
Settings
To move the seat forwards or back
Lift and hold the handle 1 to unlock the
seat. Release the handle at the desired
position and make sure that it is locked.
To raise or lower the seat base
Move the lever 2 as many times as nec-
essary upwards or downwards until the
required position is reached.
1
2
3
To tilt the seatback
Lift handle 3 and tilt the seatback to the
desired position. Release the handle at
the desired position and make sure that
it is locked.
For safety reasons, make
these adjustments only
when the vehicle is station-
ary.
We would advise you not to recline
the seatbacks too far to ensure that
the effectiveness of the seat belts is
not reduced.
Nothing should be placed on the
floor (area in front of driver) as such
objects may slide under the pedal
during braking manoeuvres, thus
obstructing its use.
1.21
Heated seats
With the ignition on:
– pressing the switch 5 on the required
seat for the first time activates the
heating system at maximum power.
Both integrated switch warning lights
come on;
– a second press decreases the heat-
ing to minimum power. One inte-
grated warning light comes on;
– pressing for the third time turns the
heating off.
FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (2/3)
5
4
To adjust the seat’s lumbar position
Lower handle 4 to increase the support
and lift it to decrease it.
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
1.22
Table function
Depending on the vehicle, the passen-
ger seatback may be folded down onto
the seat base to create a table.
– Lower the headrest;
– move the seat back;
– lower the seat base fully;
– pull the handle 7 and fully lower the
seatback.
When the front seat is in
table position, the front pas-
senger airbag airbag must
be deactivated (see the in-
formation on “Child safety: activat-
ing/deactivating the front passenger
airbag” in Section 1).
Risk of serious injury caused by
items resting on the seatback table
which may be dislodged when the
airbagairbag is deployed.
The label (on the dashboard) and
the markings (on the windscreen)
remind you of these instructions.
7
For your safety, attach any
transported objects when
the seat is in the table po-
sition.
When using the passenger seat in table
position, you must not use the two rear
seats immediately behind it.
Repositioning the seat
Make sure that nothing prevents the
seat from moving.
It is essential to pull the handle 7 to
raise the seatback. Ensure it is cor-
rectly locked in place.
Be sure to hold the seat-
back when placing the seat
in table position.
Risk of injury.
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
FRONT SEATS WITH MANUAL CONTROL (3/3)
1.23
DRIVER’S SEAT WITH ELECTRIC CONTROLS (1/2)
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
Make sure that the seatbacks are
correctly locked in place.
We would advise you not to recline
the seatbacks too far to ensure that
the effectiveness of the seat belts is
not reduced.
No object should be placed on the
floor (in front of the driver). such
objects may slide under the pedals
during sudden braking manoeuvres
and obstruct their use.
1
2
3
On equipped vehicles, switch 1 grants
access to the seats menu on the multi-
function screen (please refer to the fol-
lowing pages).
Make sure that the seat-
backs are correctly locked
in place.
Adjusting the seatback
To tilt the seatback, move the top of
switch 2 forwards or backwards.
Adjusting the lumbar support
on the driver’s seat
Move the switch 3 forwards, back-
wards, up or down.
1.24
DRIVER’S SEAT WITH ELECTRIC CONTROLS (2/2)
5
Heated seats
With the ignition on:
– pressing the switch 6 on the rele-
vant seat for the first time activates
the heating system on high. Both in-
tegrated switch warning lights come
on. The system automatically de-
cides whether or not the heating is
needed;
– pressing the switch for the second
time changes the heating to low. One
integrated warning light comes on;
– pressing for the third time turns the
heating off.
Operating faults
When an operating fault is detected,
the warning lights in the switch 6 for
the seat concerned flash or, depending
on the vehicle, switch off after approxi-
mately five seconds.
Consult an approved dealer
Adjusting the seat position
To move the seat forwards or back
Move switch 4 forwards or backwards.
To raise or lower the seat base
Move the back of switch 4 up or down.
To tilt the seat base
(depending on the vehicle)
Move the front of switch 4 upwards or
downwards.
Adjusting the seat length
Lift handle 5 to unlock. Release the
handle at the desired position and
make sure that it is locked.
6
4
1.25
FRONT SEATS: Functions (1/3)
Massage
You can activate the driver and front
passenger seat massage function.
Using the multifunction screen,
select menu “Vehicle”, “Seats” then
“Massage”.
Browse menu “Driver” or “Passenger”
to:
– select the type of massage (Tonic,
Relaxing or Lumbar);
– adjust the intensity (+ or -);
– adjust the speed (+ or -);
– reset the selected settings. Press 2
then “Reset”;
– activate/deactivate the massage
seat (ON or OFF).
Note:
– the duration of the massage is ap-
proximately ten minutes. Then the
function is disabled automatically
(back in OFF position);
– the mode that you select in the
“Multi-Sense” menu may affect the
massage configuration (please refer
to the information on “Multi-Sense” in
Section 3);
– with the engine switched off, the
massage function will run just once.
2
Using the multifunction screen, de-
pending on the vehicle you can access
a number of seat functions.
On equipped vehicles, the switch 1 per-
mits direct access to the “Seats” menu
on the multifunction screen.
Please refer to the multimedia equip-
ment instructions for further informa-
tion.
1
Massage
PassengerDriver
Massage
ON
Tonic Relaxing
Lumbar
Intensity
Speed
1.26
FRONT SEATS: Functions (2/3)
Settings
Using the multifunction screen, select
menu “Vehicle”, “Seats” then “Settings”.
You can activate or deactivate the fol-
lowing elements:
– easy driver access;
– easy passenger access;
– Courtesy for passenger;
– visual feedback of current move-
ment.
Easy driver and passenger access
Press “ON” or “OFF” to activate or de-
activate this function.
When this function is activated, the seat
moves backwards automatically as the
driver or passenger leaves the vehicle.
The passenger seat returns to its origi-
nal position when the door is closed.
The driver’s seat returns to its origi-
nal position when you press the start
button with the door closed.
Courtesy for passenger
Press “ON” or “OFF” to activate or de-
activate this function.
When this function is activated, the
driver can adjust the passenger seat
using switches 3, 4 and 5.
2
3
4
5
Easy access driver
Easy access passenger
Courtesy for passenger
Position
ON
ON
OFF
1.27
FRONT SEATS: Functions (3/3)
Position
It is possible to store the driving posi-
tion of the driver seat.
The driving position includes all the
electric settings for the seat base and
seatback.
The driving position can be stored and
recalled by pressing the buttons:
– RENAULT hands-free card detected;
– when the driver’s door is opened.
3
3
Recalling the driving position
With the vehicle at a standstill, using
the multifunction screen, select menu
“Vehicle”, “Seats”, “Settings” then
“Position”, select “Recall” and confirm.
Note: recall of the saved driving po-
sition is interrupted if one of the seat
adjustment buttons is pressed during
recall.
When driving, it is not possible to
recall a driving position.
4
5
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
Storing your driving position
– Adjust the driver seat using
switches 3, 4 and 5 (refer to previous
page);
– from the multifunction screen, select
menu “Vehicle”, “Seats”, “Settings”
then “Position” and select “Save”.
The position of the driver is then stored.
ON
Position
Visual feedback
Recall
Save
1.28
Always wear your seat belt when trav-
elling in your vehicle. You must also
comply with the legislation of the par-
ticular country you are in.
SEAT BELTS (1/3)
Seat belts which are incor-
rectly adjusted or twisted
may cause injuries in the
event of an accident.
Use one seat belt per person,
whether child or adult.
Even pregnant women should wear
a seat belt. In this case, ensure that
the lap belt is not exerting too much
pressure on the abdomen, but do
not allow any slack.
Before starting, first adjust your driv-
ing position, then ask all occupants
to adjust their seat belts to ensure
optimum protection.
Adjusting your driving
position
– Sit well back in your seat (having
first removed your coat or jacket).
This is essential to ensure your back
is positioned correctly;
– adjust the distance between the
seat and the pedals. Your seat
should be as far back as possible
while still allowing you to depress
the clutch pedal fully. The seatback
should be adjusted so that your arms
are slightly bent when you hold the
steering wheel;
– adjust the position of your head-
rest. For maximum safety, your head
must be as close as possible to the
headrest;
– adjust the height of the seat. This
adjustment allows you to select the
seat position which offers you the
best possible view;
– adjust the position of the steering
wheel.
Adjusting the seat belts
Sit with your back firmly against the
seatback.
Shoulder strap 1 should be as close as
possible to the base of the neck but not
on it.
Lap belt 2 should be worn flat over the
thighs and against the pelvis.
The belt should be worn so that it is
as close as possible to your body, ie.:
avoid wearing heavy clothing or keep-
ing bulky objects under the belts, etc.
1
2
1.29
SEAT BELTS (2/3)
Locking
Unwind the belt slowly and smoothly
and ensure that buckle 3 locks into
catch 5 (check that it is locked by pull-
ing on buckle 3).
If the belt jams, allow it to return slightly
before attempting to unwind it again.
If your seat belt is completely jammed,
pull slowly, but firmly, so that just over
3 cm unwinds. Allow it to return slightly
before attempting to unwind it again.
If there is still a problem, contact an ap-
proved dealer.
ß
Driver’s seat belt reminder
and, depending on the vehi-
cle, front passenger seat belt re-
minder
This lights up on the interior rear-view
mirror, or, depending on the vehicle, on
the central display when the engine is
started then, if the driver’s or the front
passenger’s seat belt (if this seat is oc-
cupied) is not fastened and the vehicle
has reached approximately 12.4 mph
(20 km/h), it flashes and a beep sounds
for around 2 minutes.
Note: an object placed on the passen-
ger seat base may activate the warning
light in some cases.
Rear seat belt reminder (depending
on vehicle)
Warning light
ß lights up on the
instrument panel, accompanied by the
graphic 6 for approximately 30 seconds
each time the vehicle is started, a door
is opened or a rear seat belt is fastened
or unfastened.
1
3
4
5
5
Check that the rear passengers are
wearing seat belts and that the number
of seat belts shown as fastened cor-
responds to the number of rear seat
places occupied.
Depending on the vehicle, on the
graphic 6:
– marker in green: seat belt fastened;
– marker in red: seat belt unfastened.
Unfastening
Press button 4 and the seat belt will be
rewound by the inertia reel. Guide the
belt.
6
1.30
SEAT BELTS (3/3)
Adjusting the height of the
front seat belts
Use button 7 to adjust the seat belt
height so that the shoulder strap is worn
as shown previously. Press the button 7
and raise or lower the seat belt. Make
sure that the seat belt is locked in posi-
tion correctly after you have adjusted it.
The following information applies
to the vehicle’s front and rear seat
belts.
7
– No modification may be made to the component parts of the originally
fitted restraint system: belts, seats and their mountings. For special op-
erations (e.g. fitting child seats) contact an authorised dealer.
– Do not use devices which allow any slack in the belts (e.g. clothes
pegs, clips, etc.): a seat belt which is worn too loosely may cause injury in the
event of an accident.
– Never wear the shoulder strap under your arm or behind your back.
– Never use the same belt for more than one person and never hold a baby or
child on your lap with your seat belt around them.
– The belt should never be twisted.
– Following an accident, have the seat belts checked and replaced if necessary.
Always replace your seat belts as soon as they show any signs of wear.
– Make sure that the buckle is inserted into the appropriate catch.
– Ensure that no objects are placed in the area around the seat belt catch as
they could prevent it from being properly secured.
– When the rear seats are being put back, make sure that the seat belts and
buckles are correctly positioned so that they can be used properly.
– Make sure the seat belt catch is properly positioned (it should not be hidden
away, crushed or flattened by people or objects).
1.31
Second row centre rear seat
Unwind belt 5 slowly from its housing 4.
Click buckle 9 into black catch 8.
Snap the last sliding buckle 6 into the
red catch 7.
To store away the seat belt, guide it into
housing 4 and store the two buckles
into their respective housings A and B
or, depending on the vehicle, hook
buckle 9 on magnet C.
Second row rear side seats
Slowly unwind belt 1.
Click the sliding buckle 2 into the corre-
sponding red catch 3.
Check that the rear seat
belts are positioned and op-
erating correctly each time
the rear seats are moved.
Rear seat functions
Refer to the information on “Rear
seat functions” in Section 3.
REAR SEAT BELTS
1
Third row rear seats (7-seater
versions)
Slowly unwind the strap 10.
Click the buckle 11 into the correspond-
ing black catch 12.
10
11
12
2
3
9
8
6
7
5
A
B
4
C
1.32
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (1/4)
Depending on the vehicle, they are
composed of:
– seat belt inertia reel pretension-
ers;
– central seat belt pretensioners;
– chest-level load limiter;
– airbags – Driver and passenger
front
These systems are designed to act in-
dependently or together when the vehi-
cle is subjected to a frontal impact.
Depending on the severity of the
impact, the system can trigger:
– seat belt locking;
– the seat belt inertia reel pretensioner
(which engages to correct seat belt
slack);
– the lap belt pretensioners to hold the
occupant in his seat;
– the front airbag.
Pretensioners
The pretensioners hold the seat belt
against the body, holding the occupant
more securely against the seat, thus in-
creasing the seat belt’s efficiency.
In the event of a severe frontal impact
and if the ignition is switched on, the
system may engage the following de-
pending on the force of the impact:
– the seat belt inertia reel preten-
sioner 1 which instantly retracts the
seat belt;
– the lap pretensioner 2 on the front
seats.
– Have the entire restraint
system checked following
an accident.
– No operation whatso-
ever is permitted on any part
of the system (pretensioners,
airbags, computers, wiring) and
the system components must not
be reused on any other vehicle,
even if identical.
– Only qualified personnel from our
Network may work on the airbags;
otherwise the system may trigger
accidentally and cause injury.
– The electric trigger system may
only be tested by a specially
trained technician using special
equipment.
– When the vehicle is scrapped,
contact an approved dealer for
disposal of the pretensioner and
airbags gas generators.
1
2
1.33
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (2/4)
Load limiter
Above a certain severity of impact, this
mechanism is used to limit the force of
the belt against the body so that it is at
an acceptable level.
Airbags for driver and front
passenger
Fitted to the driver and passenger side.
The presence of this equipment is indi-
cated by the word “airbag” on the steer-
ing wheel, dashboard (in the area of the
airbag A) and, depending on the vehi-
cle, a label on the lower section of the
windscreen.
Each airbag system consists of:
– an airbag and gas generator fitted on
the steering wheel for the driver and
in the dashboard for the passenger;
– an electronic unit for system monitor-
ing which controls the gas generator
electrical trigger system;
– remote sensors;
– a single
å warning light on the
instrument panel.
A
The airbag system uses py-
rotechnic principles. This
explains why, when the
airbag inflates, it will gener-
ate heat, produce smoke (this does
not mean that a fire is about to start)
and make a banging noise. In a situ-
ation where an airbag is required, it
will inflate immediately and this may
cause some minor, superficial graz-
ing to the skin or other problems.
1.34
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (3/4)
Operation
This system is only operational when
the ignition is switched on.
In a severe frontal impact, the airbags
inflate rapidly, cushioning the impact
of the driver's head and chest against
the steering wheel and of the front pas-
senger against the dashboard. The air
bags then deflate immediately so that
the passengers are not in any way hin-
dered from leaving the vehicle.
Operating faults
å This warning light comes on
when the engine is started and then
goes out after approximately three sec-
onds.
If it does not come on when the ignition
is switched on or if it stays on, there is a
fault in the system.
Contact your approved Dealer as soon
as possible.
Your protection will be reduced until this
fault is rectified.
1.35
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (4/4)
Warnings concerning the driver’s airbag
– Do not modify the steering wheel or the steering wheel boss.
– Do not cover the steering wheel boss under any circumstances.
– Do not attach any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the steering wheel boss.
– The steering wheel must not be removed (except by qualified personnel from our Network).
– Do not sit too close to the steering wheel when driving: Sit with your arms slightly bent (see the information on “Adjusting
your driving position” in Section 1). This will allow sufficient space for the air bag to deploy correctly and to be fully effective.
Warnings concerning the passenger airbag
– Do not attach or glue any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the dashboard on or near the airbag.
– Do not place anything between the dashboard and the passenger (pet, umbrella, walking stick, parcels, etc.).
– The passenger must not put his or her feet on the dashboard or seat as there is a risk that serious injuries may be sustained.
In general, parts of the body should be kept away from the dashboard (knees, hands, head, etc.)
– The devices in addition to the front passenger seat belt should be reactivated as soon as a child seat is removed, to ensure
the protection of the passenger in the event of an impact.
A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT MUST NOT BE FITTED TO THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT UNLESS
THE ADDITIONAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, I.E. THE PASSENGER AIR BAG, ARE DEACTIVATED.
(refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag” in Section 1)
All of the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent
the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when it inflates.
1.36
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE REAR SEAT BELTS
Force limiter
It is fitted to the rear side seats in the
second row.
Above a certain severity of impact, this
mechanism is used to limit the force of
the belt against the body so that it is at
an acceptable level.
– Have the entire restraint
system checked following
an accident.
– No operation whatsoever
is permitted on any part of the
system (airbags, electronic units,
wiring) and the system compo-
nents must not be reused on any
other vehicle, even if identical.
– Only qualified personnel from our
Network may work on the airbags;
otherwise the system may trigger
accidentally and cause injury.
1.37
SIDE PROTECTION DEVICES
Warning relating to the side airbag
–Fitting seat covers: seats equipped with an airbag require covers spe-
cifically designed for your vehicle. Contact an approved dealer to find
out if these covers are available. The use of any covers other than those
designed for your vehicle (including those designed for another vehicle) may
affect the operation of the airbags and reduce your protection.
– In the front, do not place any accessories, objects or even pets between the
seatback, the door and the internal fittings. Do not cover the seatback with ob-
jects such as clothes or accessories. This may prevent the airbag from operat-
ing correctly or cause injury when the airbag is deployed.
– No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on the seat or internal
fittings, except by qualified personnel from an approved dealer.
Side Airbags
This airbag is fitted to the front seats,
activated at the sides of the seats (door
side) to protect the occupants in the
event of a severe side impact.
Curtain Airbags
These are airbag fitted along the sides
of the vehicle in the ceiling which trigger
along the front and rear door side win-
dows to protect the passengers in case
of a severe side impact.
Depending on the vehicle, a mark-
ing on the windscreen informs you
of the presence of additional means
of restraint (airbags, pretensioners
etc.) in the passenger compartment.
1.38
ADDITIONAL METHODS OF RESTRAINT
The airbag is designed to complement the action of the seat belt. Both the airbag and the seat belt are integral parts
of the same protection system. It is therefore essential to wear seat belts at all times. If seat belts are not worn, the oc-
cupants are exposed to the risk of serious injury in the event of an accident. It may also increase the risk of minor su-
perficial injuries occurring when the airbag is deployed, although such minor injuries are always possible with airbags.
If the vehicle should overturn or in the event of a rear impact, however severe, the pretensioners and airbags are not always
triggered. Impacts to the underside of the vehicle, e.g. from pavements, potholes or stones, can all trigger these systems.
– No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on any part of the airbag system (airbags, pretensioners, computer,
wiring harness, etc.), except by qualified Network personnel.
– To ensure that the system is in good working order and to avoid accidental triggering of the system which may cause injury,
only qualified Network personnel may work on the airbag system.
– As a safety precaution, have the airbag system checked if your vehicle has been involved in an accident, or is stolen or
broken into.
– When selling or lending the vehicle, inform the user of these points and hand over this handbook with the vehicle.
– When scrapping your vehicle, contact your approved Dealer for disposal of the gas generator(s).
All of the warnings below are given so that the airbag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent
the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when it inflates.
1.39
CHILD SAFETY: General information (1/2)
Carrying children
Please ensure that you comply with the
legislation of your country.
Children, and adults, must be correctly
seated and strapped in for all journeys.
The children being carried in your vehi-
cle are your responsibility.
A child is not a miniature adult. Children
are at risk of specific injuries as their
muscles and bones have not yet fin-
ished growing. The seat belt alone
would not provide suitable protection.
Use an approved child seat and ensure
you use it correctly.
A collision at 30 mph
(50 km/h) is the same as fall-
ing a distance of 10 metres.
Transporting a child without
a restraint is the equivalent of allow-
ing him or her to play on a fourth-
floor balcony without railings.
Never travel with a child held in your
arms. In the event of an accident,
you will not be able to keep hold of
the child, even if you yourself are
wearing a seat belt.
If your vehicle has been involved in
a road accident, replace the child
seat and have the seat belts and
ISOFIX anchorage points checked.
To prevent the doors being
opened, use the “Child
safety” device (refer to the
information on “Opening
and closing the doors” in Section 1).
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or by locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.40
CHILD SAFETY: General information (2/2)
Using a child seat
The level of protection offered by the
child seat depends on its ability to re-
strain your child and on its installation.
Incorrect installation compromises the
protection it offers the child in the event
of harsh braking or an impact.
Before purchasing a child seat, check
that it complies with the regulations for
the country you are in and that it can
be fitted in your vehicle. Consult an ap-
proved dealer to find out which seats
are recommended for your vehicle.
Before fitting a child seat, read the
manual and respect its instructions. If
you experience any difficulties during
installation, contact the manufacturer
of the equipment. Keep the instructions
with the seat.
Set a good example by always fas-
tening your seat belt and teaching
your child:
– to strap themselves in correctly;
– to always get in and out of the car
at the kerb, away from busy traf-
fic.
Do not use a second-hand child
seat or one without an instruction
manual.
Check that there are no objects in
the vicinity of the child seat which
could impede its operation.
Never leave a child unat-
tended in the vehicle.
Check that your child is
always strapped in and that
the belt or safety harness used is
correctly set and adjusted. Avoid
wearing bulky clothing which could
cause the belts to slacken.
Never let your child put their head or
arms out of the window.
Check that the child is in the correct
position for the entire journey, espe-
cially if asleep.
1.41
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat
Rear-facing child seats
A baby’s head is, proportionally, heavier
than that of an adult and its neck is very
fragile. Transport the child in this po-
sition for as long as possible (until the
age of 2 at the very least). It supports
both the head and the neck.
Choose a bucket type seat for best side
protection and change it as soon as the
child’s head is higher than the shell.
Forward-facing child seats
The child’s head and abdomen need to
be protected as a priority. A forward-fac-
ing child seat which is firmly attached to
the vehicle will reduce the risk of impact
to the head. Ensure your child travels in
a forward-facing seat with a harness for
as long as their size permits.
Choose a bucket type seat for optimum
side protection.
Booster cushions
From 15 kg or 4 years, the child can
travel using a booster seat, which will
enable the seat belt to be adapted to
suit his/her size and shape. The boos-
ter seat cushion must be fitted with
guides to position the seat belt on the
child’s thighs rather than the stomach.
It is recommended that you use a seat-
back fitted with a belt strap guide which
can be adjusted in terms of height to
position the seat belt in the centre of the
shoulder. It must never rest on the neck
or on the arm.
Choose a bucket type seat for optimum
side protection.
1.42
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (1/3)
There are two ways of attaching child
seats: via the seat belt or using the
ISOFIX system.
The seat belt must never
be twisted or the tension
relieved. Never pass the
shoulder strap under the
arm or behind the back.
Check that the seat belt has not
been damaged by sharp edges.
If the seat belt does not operate nor-
mally, it will not protect the child.
Consult an approved dealer. Do not
use this seat until the seat belt has
been repaired.
Do not use the child seat
if it may unfasten the seat
belt restraining it: the base
of the seat must not rest on
the buckle and/or catch of the seat
belt.
Attachment via the seat belt
The seat belt must be adjusted to
ensure that it is effective in the event of
harsh braking or an impact.
Ensure that the strap paths indicated
by the child seat manufacturer are re-
spected.
Always check that the seat belt is cor-
rectly fastened by pulling it up, then
pulling it out fully whilst pressing on the
child seat.
Check that the seat is correctly held by
moving it from side to side and back
to front: the seat should remain firmly
fixed.
Check that the child seat has not been
installed at an angle and that it is not
resting against a window.
1.43
The ISOFIX anchorage
points have been exclu-
sively designed for child
seats with the ISOFIX
system. Never fit a different type of
child seat, seat belt or other objects
to these anchorage points. Check
that nothing is obstructing the an-
chorage points.
If your vehicle has been involved in
a road accident, have the ISOFIX
anchorage points checked and re-
place your child seat.
Attachment using the ISOFIX
system
Approved child seats ISOFIX are stand-
ardised in accordance with current reg-
ulations if any of the four cases below
applies:
– ISOFIX universal 3-point forward-
facing seat;
– ISOFIX semi-universal 2-point seat;
– Specific;
– i-Size Which has:
– either a belt which attaches to the
third ring of the seat concerned;
– or a strut that rests on the vehi-
cle floor, compatible with the ap-
proved seat i-Size, the role of
which is to prevent the child seat
from moving in the event of a col-
lision.
In the latter three cases check that your
child seat can be installed by consulting
the list of compatible vehicles.
No modifications may be
made to the component
parts of the restraint system
(ISOFIX seat belts, seats
and their mountings) originally fitted.
Before using an ISOFIX
child seat that you pur-
chased for another vehicle,
check that its installation is
authorised. Consult the list of ve-
hicles which can be fitted with the
seat from the equipment manufac-
turer.
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (2/3)
Attach the child seat with the ISOFIX
locks, if these are provided. The ISOFIX
system allows quick, easy, safe fitting.
The ISOFIX system consists of 2 rings
and, in some cases, a third ring.
1.44
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (3/3)
2
Rear side seats
The third ring 2 or 3 is used to attach
the upper strap on some seats ISOFIX.
The rings are located on the rear seat-
backs and indicated by the symbol
.
Attachment using the ISOFIX
system (continued)
The two rings 1 are located between
the seatback and the seat base of the
seat and are identified by a marking.
The child seat strap must
be attached to the corre-
sponding ring.
Do not use any other
mounting point.
1
3
Check that the seatback
of the forward-facing child
seat is in contact with the
seatback of the vehicle
seat. In this case, the child seat may
not always rest on the seat base of
the vehicle seat.
1.45
CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (1/2)
The types of child seats indicated may
not be available. Before using a differ-
ent child seat, check with the manufac-
turer that it can be fitted.
In the front seat
The laws concerning children travel-
ling in the front passenger seat differ in
every country. Consult the legislation in
force and follow the indications on the
diagram on the following page.
Before fitting a child seat in this seat (if
authorised):
– lower the seat belt as far as possible;
– move the seat as far back as possi-
ble;
– gently tilt the seatback away from
vertical (approximately 25°);
– on equipped vehicles, raise the seat
base as far as possible.
In all situations, reinsert the headrest to
its full extent so that it does not interfere
with the child seat (see the information
on “Front headrests” in Section 1);
Some seats are not suitable for fitting
child seats. The diagram on the follow-
ing page shows you how to attach a
child seat.
Fit the child seat in a rear
seat wherever possible.
Make sure that the child
seat or the child’s feet do
not prevent the front seat from lock-
ing correctly. Refer to the informa-
tion on the “Front seat” in Section 1.
Check that when installing the child
seat in the vehicle it is not at risk of
coming loose from its base.
If you have to remove the headrest,
check that it is correctly stored so
that it does not come loose under
harsh braking or impact.
Always attach the child seat to the
vehicle even if it is not in use so that
it does not come loose under harsh
braking or impact.
RISK OF DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY: before
fitting a rear-facing child
seat to this seat, check
that the airbag has been deacti-
vated (refer to the information on
“Child safety: deactivating/activat-
ing the front passenger airbag” in
Section 1).
After installing the child seat, if neces-
sary, the seat may be advanced (so as
to leave enough space in the rear seats
for passengers or other child seats).
For a rear-facing child seat, do not let
it touch the dashboard or move it to the
furthest forward position.
Do not change other settings after in-
stalling the child seat.
1.46
CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (2/2)
In the rear seat
A carrycot can be installed across the
vehicle and will take up at least two
seats. Position the child with his or her
feet nearest the door.
Move the front seat as far forward as
possible to install a rear-facing child
seat, then move back the seat in front
as far as it will go, although without al-
lowing it to come into contact with the
child seat.
For the safety of the child in the for-
ward-facing position:
– move the relevant seat backwards
as far as possible;
– move the seat in front of the child
forwards, and set the position of the
seatback to avoid contact between
the seat and the child’s legs.
Always remove the headrest from the
rear seat used for the child seat (see
“Rear headrests” in Section 3). If nec-
essary, position the vehicle seat as far
back as possible. This must be done
before fitting the child seat.
Check that the child seat is resting
against the back of the vehicle seat.
Ensure that the child seat
or the child’s feet do not
prevent the front seat from
locking correctly. Refer to
the information on the “Front seat”
in Section 1 or the “Rear seats” in
Section 3.
The floor of your vehicle
has storage spaces. Before
installing a child seat with
a floor support, ensure that
this seat can be correctly installed
by consulting the list of compatible
vehicles supplied with the child seat.
Risk of serious injury in the event
of sudden braking or accident.
When fitting a child seat
(Group 2 or 3 booster seat),
check that the seat belts op-
erate (wind) correctly: refer
to Section 1 “Rear seat belts”. If
necessary, adjust the position of the
vehicle seat.
For 7-seater vehicles, a
child seat with a floor sup-
port should never be in-
stalled on the third row rear
seats.
For 7-seater vehicles, the second row
rear seats must be pushed forward
before a child is seated in the third row
rear seats.
1.47
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (1/6)
Visual installation of the five-seater version
RISK OF DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY: Before
installing a child seat on the
front passenger seat, check
that the airbag has been deacti-
vated (please refer to “Child safety:
front passenger airbag deactivation
and activation” in Section 1).
Using a child safety system
which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.
³ Check the status of the airbag
before fitting a child seat or allowing a
passenger to use the seat.
²
Seat not suitable for fitting
child seats.
¬ Seat which allows a child seat
with “Universal” approval to be attached
by a seat belt.
1.48
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (2/6)
Five-seater version
Type of child seat
Weight of
the child
Front passenger seat (1) (5)
Rear side seats Rear centre seat
Without airbag
or with airbag
deactivated
With airbag
activated
Carrycot fitted
across the vehicle
Group 0
< 10 kg X X U (2) X
Rear-facing shell
seat
Groups 0 or 0 +
< 10 kg and
< 13 kg
U X U (3) X
Shell seat/rear-facing
seat
Groups 0+ and 1
< 13 kg and 9 to
18 kg
U X U (3) X
Forward-facing seat
Group 1
9 to 18 kg U X U (3) (4) X
Booster seat
Groups 2 and 3
15 to 25 kg and
22 to 36 kg
U X U (3) (4) X
(1) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: Before installing a child seat on the front passenger seat, check that
the airbag has been deactivated (please refer to “Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation and activation” in
Section 1).
The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous page, to ensure the applica-
ble regulations are respected.
1.49
X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.
U = Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.
(2) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest
the door.
(3) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-
facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the
child seat.
(4) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the
child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,
move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
(5) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (3/6)
1.50
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (4/6)
Seven-seat version
Type of child seat Weight of the child
Front passenger seat (1) (6)
Row 2 rear
side seats
Row 2 rear
centre seat
Row 3 rear
centre
seat (5)
Without airbag
or with airbag
deactivated
With airbag
activated
Carrycot fitted
across the vehicle
Group 0
< 10 kg X X U (2) X X
Rear-facing shell
seat
Groups 0 or 0 +
< 10 kg and < 13 kg U X U (3) X X
Shell seat/rear-facing
seat
Groups 0+ and 1
< 13 kg and 9 to 18
kg
U X U (3) X X
Forward-facing seat
Group 1
9 to 18 kg U X U (3) (4) X U (7)
Booster seat
Groups 2 and 3
15 to 25 kg and 22
to 36 kg
U X U (3) (4) X U
(1) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: Before installing a child seat on the front passenger seat, check that
the airbag has been deactivated (please refer to “Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation and activation” in
Section 1).
The table below summarises the information already shown in the diagram on the following pages, to ensure the appli-
cable regulations are respected.
1.51
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (5/6)
X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.
U = Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.
(2) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest
the door.
(3) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-
facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the
child seat.
(4) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the
child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,
move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
(5) Push the seat(s) in front of the child in a third row seat as far forward as possible.
(6) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).
(7) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: a child seat with a floor support must never be fitted.
1.52
³ Check the status of the airbag
before fitting a child seat or allowing a
passenger to use the seat.
²
Seat not suitable for fitting
child seats.
¬ Seat which allows a child seat
with “Universal” approval to be attached
by a seat belt.
Using a child safety system
which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.
RISK OF DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY: Before
installing a child seat on the
front passenger seat, check
that the airbag has been deacti-
vated (please refer to “Child safety:
front passenger airbag deactivation
and activation” in Section 1).
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (6/6)
Installation diagram, 7-seater version
1.53
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX system (1/6)
Seat which allows an ISOFIX
child seat to be fitted.
± The rear seats are fitted with
an anchorage point which allows a
forward-facing ISOFIX child seat with
universal approval to be attached. The
anchorage points are located on the
backs of the rear seats.
Using a child safety system
which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.
²
Seat which does not allow a
child seat to be fitted.
Visual installation of the five-seater version
1.54
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX system (2/6)
Five-seater version
Type of child seat
Weight of
the child
Seat size
ISOFIX
Passenger front seat (4) (1)
Rear side
seats
Rear centre
seat
Without airbag
or with airbag
deactivated
With airbag
activated
Carrycot fitted across
the vehicle
Group 0
< 10 kg F, G X X X X
Rear-facing shell
seat
Groups 0 or 0 +
< 10 kg and
< 13 kg
E IL X IL (1) X
Shell seat/rear-facing
seat
Groups 0+ and 1
< 13 kg and 9
to 18 kg
C, D IL X IL (1) X
Forward-facing seat
Group 1
9 to 18 kg A, B, B1 IUF - IL X
IUF - IL
(2) (3)
X
Booster seat
Groups 2 and 3
15 to 25 kg
and 22 to 36
kg
IUF - IL X
IUF - IL
(2) (3)
X
Seat i-Size i-U X i-U X
The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous page, to ensure the regula-
tions in force are respected.
1.55
X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats ISOFIX.
IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal/semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be at-
tached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.
i-U = Suitable for the i-Size restraint devices in the “universal” forward-facing and backward-facing category.
(1) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).
(2) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-
facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the
child seat.
(3) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the
child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,
move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
The size of the ISOFIX child seat is indicated by a letter:
– A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
– C and D: shell seat or rear-facing seats in group 0+ (less than 13 kg) or group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
– E: rear-facing shell seats in group 0 (less than 10 kg) or 0+ (less than 13 kg);
– F and G: cots in group 0 (less than 10 kg).
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the ISOFIX system (3/6)
(4) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before installing a child seat in the front passenger seat, make sure the
airbag has been deactivated (refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivation, activation of the front passenger
airbag” in Section 1).
1.56
Seven-seat version
Type of child seat
Weight of
the child
Seat size
ISOFIX
Passenger front seat (4) (1)
Row 2 rear
side seats
Row 2 rear
centre seat
Row 3 rear
centre
seat
Without
airbag or
with airbag
deactivated
With airbag
activated
Carrycot fitted across
the vehicle
Group 0
< 10 kg F, G X X X X X
Rear-facing shell
seat
Groups 0 or 0 +
< 10 kg and
< 13 kg
E IL X IL (2) X X
Shell seat/rear-facing
seat
Groups 0+ and 1
< 13 kg and 9
to 18 kg
C, D IL X IL (2) X X
Forward-facing seat
Group 1
9 to 18 kg A, B, B1 IUF - IL X IUF - IL (2) (3) X X
Booster seat
Groups 2 and 3
15 to 25 kg
and 22 to 36
kg
IUF - IL X IUF - IL (2) (3) X X
Seat i-Size i-U X i-U X X
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (4/6)
The table below summarises the information already shown in the diagram on the following pages, to ensure the appli-
cable regulations are respected.
1.57
X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats ISOFIX.
IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal/semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be at-
tached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.
i-U = Suitable for the i-Size restraint devices in the “universal” forward-facing and backward-facing category.
(1) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).
(2) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rear-
facing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the
child seat.
(3) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the
child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,
move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
The size of the ISOFIX child seat is indicated by a letter:
– A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
– C and D: shell seat or rear-facing seats in group 0+ (less than 13 kg) or group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
– E: rear-facing shell seats in group 0 (less than 10 kg) or 0+ (less than 13 kg);
– F and G: cots in group 0 (less than 10 kg).
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (5/6)
(4) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: before installing a child seat in the front passenger seat, make sure the
airbag has been deactivated (refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivation, activation of the front passenger
airbag” in Section 1).
1.58
Visual installation of seven-seater version
Seat which allows an ISOFIX
child seat to be fitted.
± The rear seats are fitted with
an anchorage point which allows a
forward-facing ISOFIX child seat with
universal approval to be attached. The
anchorage points are located on the
backs of the rear seats.
Using a child safety system
which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.
²
Seat which does not allow a
child seat to be fitted.
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (6/6)
1.59
Deactivating the front
passenger airbag
Before fitting a child seat on the front
passenger seat you must deactivate
the passenger airbag.
The front passenger airbag
must only be activated or
deactivated when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
If it is interfered with when the ve-
hicle is being driven, indicator lights
å and © will come on.
Switch the ignition off then on again
to reset the airbag in accordance
with the lock position.
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating front passenger AIRBAG (1/3)
To deactivate the airbag: with the ve-
hicle stopped and the ignition off,
push and turn the lock 1 to the OFF po-
sition.
With the ignition on, it is essential to
check that the
¹ warning light is
correctly lit on the display 2 or, depend-
ing on the vehicle, on the rear-view
mirror 3.
This light remains permanently lit to
let you know that you can fit a child
seat.
DANGER
Since operation of the front
passenger airbag is not
compatible with the po-
sition of a rear-facing child seat,
NEVER fit a rear-facing child re-
straint system in a seat protected
by an ACTIVATED front AIRBAG.
This can lead to the DEATH of the
CHILD or SERIOUS INJURY.
1
2
3
1.60
4
A
A
The markings on the dashboard and
labels A on each side of the passen-
ger sun visor 4 (example: label shown
above) remind you of these instruc-
tions.
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating front passenger AIRBAG (2/3)
DANGER
Since operation of the front
passenger airbag is not
compatible with the po-
sition of a rear-facing child seat,
NEVER fit a rear-facing child re-
straint system in a seat protected
by an ACTIVATED front AIRBAG.
This can lead to the DEATH of the
CHILD or SERIOUS INJURY.
1.61
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating front passenger AIRBAG (3/3)
Operating faults
It is forbidden to fit a rear-facing child
seat to the front passenger seat if the
airbags activation/deactivation system
is faulty.
Allowing any other passenger to sit in
that seat is not recommended.
Contact your approved dealer as soon
as possible.
Activating the front
passenger airbag
You should reactivate the airbag as
soon as you remove the child seat from
the front passenger seat to ensure the
protection of the front passenger in the
event of an impact.
To reactivate the airbags : with the
vehicle at a standstill, and the igni-
tion off, push and turn lock 1 to the ON
position.
With the ignition on, it is essential to
check that the
] warning light is
off and that the
light is lit on the
display 2 or, depending on the vehicle,
on the rear-view mirror 3 for around
1 minute after each time the engine is
started.
The front passenger seat belt additional
restraint systems are activated.
The front passenger airbag
must only be activated or
deactivated when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
If it is interfered with when the ve-
hicle is being driven, indicator lights
å and © will come on.
Switch the ignition off then on again
to reset the airbag in accordance
with the lock position.
1
2
3
1.62
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (1/2)
5
4
8
9
12
1
14
29
10
137
1 1
28
6
2
2
1 2
25
3
26
23
16
17
1818
15
11
19
24
16
17
20
21
22
1.63
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (2/2)
The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.
1 Air vent.
2 Demister outlet.
3 Stalk for:
– direction indicator lights;
– exterior lights;
– rear fog lights.
4 Steering wheel with driver’s Airbag
location, horn.
5 Instrument panel.
6 Head-up display.
7 Controls for:
– on-board computer information
read-out and vehicle settings cus-
tomisation menu,
– remote radio and navigation
system.
8 Steering column stalk for wind-
screen and rear screen wash/
wiper.
9 Heating or air conditioning con-
trols.
10 Multifunction touch-screen.
11 Multifunction screen controls:
– screen activation/deactivation;
– volume;
– welcome menu;
– driving aids menu;
– settings.
12 Switches for:
– hazard warning lights;
– electric door locking.
13 Passenger Airbag location.
14 glove box or storage drawer.
15 Controls for:
– front seat heating;
– activation/deactivation, depend-
ing on the vehicle, of the ECO
mode;
– activation/deactivation of the
parking distance control system;
– activation/deactivation of the
function Stop and Start.
16 Assisted parking brake control.
17 Main switch for:
– speed limiter;
– cruise control;
– adaptive cruise control.
18 Gearstick.
19 Accessories and multimedia sock-
ets.
20 Multi-Sense control.
21
Automatic gearbox gear display.
22 Handbrake.
23 Engine start/stop button (vehicles
with RENAUL
T card).
24 Ignition switch (vehicles with key).
25 Control for adjusting steering
wheel height and reach.
26 Cruise control/speed limiter and
adaptive cruise control controls.
28 Bonnet release control.
29 Controls for:
– headlight beam height remote ad-
justment;
– instrument panel lighting dimmer.
1.64
DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (1/2)
2
8
11
12
14
2
26
19
23
7
3
13
1
1
9
1
2
6
16
17
28
15
54
18
1
27
10
20
21
24
20
25
21
22
1.65
DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (2/2)
The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.
10 Head-up display.
11 Instrument panel.
12 Steering wheel with driver’s Airbag
location, horn.
13 Controls for:
– on-board computer information
read-out and vehicle settings cus-
tomisation menu,
– remote radio and navigation
system.
14 Steering column stalk for wind-
screen and rear screen wash/
wiper.
15 Controls for:
– headlight beam height remote ad-
justment;
– instrument panel lighting dimmer.
16 Ignition switch (vehicles with key).
17 Control for adjusting steering
wheel height and reach.
18 Engine start/stop button (vehicles
with RENAULT card).
19 Switches for:
– hazard warning lights;
– electric door locking.
20 Assisted parking brake control.
21 Main switch for:
– speed limiter;
– cruise control;
– adaptive cruise control.
22 Handbrake.
23 Accessories and multimedia sock-
ets.
24 Multi-Sense control.
25 Gearstick.
26 glove box or storage drawer.
27 Automatic gearbox gear display.
28 Bonnet release control.
1 Air vent.
2 Demister outlet.
3 Passenger Airbag location.
4 Controls for:
– front seat heating;
– activation/deactivation, depend-
ing on the vehicle, of the ECO
mode;
–
activation/deactivation of the
parking distance control system;
– activation/deactivation of the
function Stop and Start.
5
Heating or air conditioning con-
trols.
6 Multifunction touch-screen.
7 Multifunction screen controls:
– screen activation/deactivation;
– volume;
– welcome menu;
– driving aids menu;
– settings.
8 Stalk:
– direction indicator lights;
– exterior lights;
– rear fog lights.
9 Cruise control/speed limiter and
adaptive cruise control controls.
1.66
š
Side light warning light
á
Main beam headlight tell-
tale
k
Dipped beam headlight tell-
tale
f
Rear fog lights tell-tale
Automatic main beam head-
light indicator light
Please refer to the information
on “External signals and lights” in
Section 1.
c
Left-hand direction indicator
tell-tale
b
Right-hand direction indica-
tor tell-tale
A
If no lights or sounds are ap-
parent, this indicates a fault
in the instrument panel. This
indicates that it is essential
to stop immediately (as soon as traf-
fic conditions allow). Ensure that the
vehicle is correctly immobilised and
contact an approved Dealer.
Instrument panel A or B: This comes
on when the driver's door is opened.
The © warning light means
you should drive very carefully to
an approved dealer as soon as pos-
sible. If you fail to follow this recom-
mendation, you risk damaging your
vehicle.
Warning light ® re-
quires you to stop immedi-
ately, for your own safety,
as soon as traffic conditions
allow. Switch off the engine and do
not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
WARNING LIGHTS (1/6)
B
In some cases, the appearance of a
warning light is accompanied by a mes-
sage.
1.67
WARNING LIGHTS (2/6)
M
Low fuel level warning light
It lights up orange when the ig-
nition or the engine is switched on then,
depending on the vehicle, goes off after
a few seconds or is displayed in white.
If it comes on orange while driving and
is accompanied by a beep, fill up with
fuel as soon as possible. There is only
approximately 30 miles (50 km) worth
of fuel left.
®
STOP light
This lights up when the igni-
tion or engine is switched on and goes
out as soon as the engine is running. It
comes on with other warning lights and/
or messages, and is accompanied by
a beep.
It requires you to stop immediately, for
your own safety, as soon as traffic con-
ditions allow. Switch off the engine and
do not restart it.
Contact an approved Dealer.
À
Oil pressure warning light
It lights up when the ignition or
the engine is switched on and goes off
after a few seconds.
If it comes on on the road, accompa-
nied by the
® warning light and
a beep, stop immediately and cut the
ignition.
Check the oil level. If the level is normal,
the indicator light is being lit by some-
thing else.
Call an approved Dealer.
Warning light for electronic
stability program ( ESC ) and
traction control system
It lights up when the ignition or the
engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
There are several reasons for the warn-
ing light to come on: please refer to the
information on “Driver correction de-
vices and aids” in Section 2.
D
Brake circuit fault warning
light
This lights up when the ignition is
switched on or when the engine is
started, then goes out.
If it comes on during braking and is ac-
companied by the
® warning light
and a beep, it indicates that the fluid
level in the circuit is low or that there is
a braking system fault.
Stop as soon as traffic conditions allow
and consult an approved dealer.
Ú
Battery charge warning light
It lights up when the ignition or
the engine is switched on and goes off
after a few seconds.
If it comes on on the road, accompa-
nied by the
® warning light and a
beep, this indicates an overload or dis-
charge in the electrical circuit.
Stop as soon as traffic conditions allow
and contact an approved Dealer.
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
1.68
x
Anti-lock braking warning
light
It lights up when the ignition or the
engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
If it lights up when you are driving, it in-
dicates a fault in the anti-lock braking
system.
Braking will then be as normal, without
the ABS. Contact an approved Dealer
as soon as possible.
Ô
Coolant temperature warn-
ing light
This lights up red when the ignition is
switched on or the engine is started.
If it turns red, stop and let the engine
idle for a minute or two.
The temperature should drop.
Otherwise, stop the engine. Let the
engine cool down before checking the
coolant.
Contact an approved Dealer.
WARNING LIGHTS (3/6)
U
Variable power-assisted
steering warning light
It lights up when the ignition or the
engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
If it comes on while driving, alongside
the warning light
®, this means
there is a system fault.
Contact an authorised dealer.
©
Warning light
This lights up when the ignition
or engine is switched on and goes out
as soon as the engine is running. It can
light up in conjunction with other warn-
ing lights and/or messages on the in-
strument panel.
It means you should drive very care-
fully to an approved dealer as soon as
possible. If you fail to follow this recom-
mendation, you risk damaging your ve-
hicle.
Ä
Toxic Fume Filter System
Warning Light
On vehicles which are equipped with it,
if the vehicle is in the engine standby
phase this light comes on when you
start the engine and, depending on the
vehicle, when you switch off the ignition
(refer to the information on the "Stop
and Start function" in Section 2) then
goes out.
– If it lights up continuously, consult
your approved dealer as soon as
possible;
– if it flashes, reduce the engine speed
until the light stops flashing. Contact
your approved Dealer as soon as
possible.
Please refer to the information on
“Maintenance and anti-pollution advice”
in Section 2.
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
1.69
WARNING LIGHTS (4/6)
É
Preheating warning light
(diesel version)
This should come on when the igni-
tion is switched on. It indicates that the
heater plugs are in operation.
It goes out when preheating is com-
plete. The engine can be started.
2
Door(s) open warning light
Š ‰
Gear change indicator
This lights up to advise you to
change to a higher gear (up arrow) or
lower gear (down arrow).
Depending on the vehicle, the most
suitable gear is displayed on the instru-
ment panel.
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in
Section 2.
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Ó
Brake pedal warning light
This lights up when the brake
pedal should be depressed. Refer to
the information on the “Automatic gear-
box” in Section 2.
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in Section
2.
}
Handbrake “on” and elec-
tronic parking brake warn-
ing light
Refer to the information on the
“Handbrake” and “Electronic parking
brake” in Section 2.
å
Indicator lightAirbag
This warning light will be dis-
played on the instrument panel when
the ignition is switched on or the engine
is started, and will then go out after a
few seconds.
If it does not come on when the igni-
tion is switched on, or comes on when
the engine is running, there is a fault in
the system.
Contact your approved Dealer as soon
as possible.
“Hybrid Assist” system
warning light
If it lights up while driving, this means
there is a fault in the 48 V electrical
circuit. Contact your approved Dealer
straight away.
Refer to the information on the “Hybrid
Assist” system in Section 2.
1.70
WARNING LIGHTS (5/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Assisted parking brake fault
light
Please refer to the information on the
“Assisted parking brake” in Section 2.
Emergency active brake
assist
Refer to the information on “Driving cor-
rection devices and aids” in Section 2.
ECO mode warning light
This comes on when ECO
mode is activated.
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, Eco-driving" in Section
2.
Rear seat belt reminder (depending
on vehicle)
Warning light ß comes on, accom-
panied (depending on the vehicle) by
a message indicating the number of
fastened seat belts on the instrument
panel for approximately 30 seconds,
each time the vehicle is started, a door
is opened or a rear seat belt is fas-
tened/unfastened. Check that the rear
passengers are wearing seat belts and
that the number of seat belts shown as
fastened corresponds to the number of
rear seat places occupied.
Tyre pressure monitoring
system
Refer to the information on the “Tyre
pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
Lane departure system
warning light
Please refer to the information on “Lane
departure warning” in Section 2.
Engine standby warning
light
Please see information in the para-
graph on “Stop and Start Function” in
Section 2.
Unavailability of engine
standby warning light
Please see information in the para-
graph on “Stop and Start Function” in
Section 2.
ÐÎ
Speed limiter warning
lights
Refer to the information on the “Speed
limiter” in Section 2.
ÏΦ
Cruise control
warning lights
Refer to the information on “Cruise con-
trol” in Section 2.
Adaptive cruise control
warning light
Refer to the information on "Adaptive
cruise control" in Section 2.
1.71
WARNING LIGHTS (6/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
On display C or, depending on the
vehicle, on the rear-view mirror D
Passenger Airbag ON
Refer to the information on
“Child safety: deactivating/activating
the front passenger airbag” in Section 1.
¹
Passenger Airbag OFF
Refer to the information on
“Child safety: deactivating/activating
the front passenger airbag” in
Section 1).
ß
Driver’s seat belt reminder
and, depending on the vehi-
cle, front passenger seat belt re-
minder.
This lights up when the ignition is
switched on if the driver's or front pas-
senger's seat belt (if the passenger
seat is occupied) is not fastened and
the vehicle has reached approximately
12.4 mph (20 km/h), it flashes and a
beep sounds for around 2 minutes.
Note: an object placed on the passen-
ger seat base can activate the warning
light.
C
D
1.72
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (1/6)
Instrument panel A
lights up when the driver’s door is
opened. In some cases, the appear-
ance of a warning light is accompanied
by a message.
On a vehicle equipped with a multifunc-
tion screen you can customise your in-
strument panel with the content and
colours of your choice.
From the multifunction screen, select
the menu “System”, then “User profile”.
Refer to the handbook for the equip-
ment.
Rev counter 1
(graduations x 1000)
Speedometer 2
This is displayed differently according
to how the instrument panel is custom-
ised.
Overspeed buzzer
Depending on the vehicle and coun-
try, a buzzer sounds for approximately
10 seconds every 40 seconds, as long
as the vehicle is travelling in excess of
72 mph (120 km/h).
3
A
Driving style indicator 3
Please refer to the information on
“ECO-driving” in Section 2.
Trip computer and warning system
Refer to the information on the “Trip
computer and warning system” in
Section 1.
1
2
1.73
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (2/6)
Fuel gauge 5
If the level is at the minimum, warn-
ing light
M integrated in the indica-
tor comes on orange, accompanied by
a beep. Fill up as soon as possible.
Coolant temperature indicator 4
5
4
1.74
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (3/6)
Instrument panel B
lights up when the driver’s door is
opened. In some cases, the appear-
ance of a warning light is accompanied
by a message.
Rev counter 6
(graduations x 1000)
Speedometer 7
This is displayed differently according
to how the instrument panel is custom-
ised.
Overspeed buzzer
Depending on the vehicle and coun-
try, a buzzer sounds for approximately
10 seconds every 40 seconds, as long
as the vehicle is travelling in excess of
72 mph (120 km/h).
8
B
Driving style indicator 8
Please refer to the information on
“ECO-driving” in Section 2.
Trip computer and warning system
Refer to the information on the “Trip
computer and warning system” in
Section 1.
7
6
1.75
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (4/6)
11
10
Coolant temperature indicator 9
In normal use, the indicator 9 should be
before the red zone 10. Under “inten-
sive” operating conditions, the needle
may approach this zone. This is not se-
rious unless the warning light
®
comes on accompanied by a message
on the instrument panel and a beep.
Fuel gauge 11
If the level is at the minimum, warn-
ing light
M integrated in the indica-
tor comes on orange, accompanied by
a beep. Fill up as soon as possible.
9
14
12
13
Instrument panel in miles
(option to switch to km/h)
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
– With the ignition off, press the OK
button 12 and the engine start/stop
button 14;
– using control 13, select “Settings”,
“Instrument panel”, then the unit;
– Press the OK button 12 to confirm.
To return to the previous mode, repeat
the same operation.
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
On the multifunction screen, select
“System” , “User profile” and “Unit”.
Note: In both cases, once the battery
is switched off, the on-board computer
automatically returns to the original unit
of measurement.
Engine oil level low warning
When the engine is started, the instru-
ment panel display alerts you when the
minimum oil level is reached. Refer to
the information on the “Engine oil level”
in Section 4.
The first time the warning appears, it
can be cleared by pressing switch 12
“OK”. Subsequent warnings will disap-
pear automatically after around 30 sec-
onds.
1.76
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (5/6)
Head-up display 15
The display details driving and navi-
gation information from the instrument
panel and the multifunction screen.
If fitted to the vehicle, this comes on
when the engine is started and is re-
tracted when the engine is switched off.
15
You can adjust certain settings from the
multifunction screen: with the engine
running, access menu “System”,
“Display” then “Head-up display”.
Adjusting the display information
height
Depending on your driving position,
you can raise or lower the information
on the display.
Adjusting the display brightness
You can adjust the brightness (day or
night mode)
– automatically: the brightness will
vary depending on the outdoor light.
– manually: the brightness automati-
cally switches with the activation/de-
activation of the lights.
In both cases, the day mode varies
based on the outdoor brightness.
Good information visibility can be af-
fected by:
– the seat position;
– the presence of an object placed
on the opened display;
– the polarisation of some spectacle
lenses;
– extreme weather conditions (rain,
snow, very strong sunlight, etc.).
In the event of contradic-
tory information between
the instrument panel and
the head-up display/multi-
function screen, please refer to the
information displayed on the instru-
ment panel.
Do not manually force the opening/
closure of the head-up display.
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
1.77
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (6/6)
Operating faults
In the event of a malfunction (the dis-
play fails to open when the engine is
started, or the display retracts, with the
engine running, following an object im-
pacting the display):
– stop and restart the engine;
or
– from the multifunction screen,
change the display opening settings.
If there is still a problem, contact an au-
thorised dealer.
With the display opened or closed,
no object should be placed on it or
in its housing.
Do not use solvents, detergents or
an abrasive cloth to clean the dis-
play.
Only use a microfibre wipe.
1.78
TRIP COMPUTER: general information (1/2)
1
Display selection keys 2
Scroll through the following information
by repeated short presses on button 2
(the display depends on the vehicle
equipment and country):
a) total mileage and trip mileage re-
corder;
b) journey parameters:
– average fuel consumption;
– current fuel consumption;
– estimated range;
– distance travelled;
– average speed;
c) current speed;
d) distance before service;
e) tyre pressure reset;
f) trip log, operating faults and informa-
tion message readout.
Trip computer and warning
system 1 or 3
Depending on the vehicle, this includes
the following functions:
– distance travelled;
– journey parameters;
– information messages;
– operating fault messages (associ-
ated with the
© warning light);
– warning messages (associated with
the
® warning light);
All these functions are described on the
following pages.
2
3
2
1.79
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: general information (2/2)
4
Interpreting some of the
values displayed after
resetting
The values showing average fuel con-
sumption and average speed will
become more stable and reliable the
further you have travelled since the last
time the Reset button was pressed.
The average fuel consumption may de-
crease when:
– the vehicle stops accelerating;
– the engine reaches its operating
temperature (if the engine was cold
when the reset key was pressed);
– when driving from an urban area
onto the open road.
Automatic resetting of the
journey parameters
Resetting occurs automatically when
the maximum value of any of the pa-
rameters is exceeded.
Trip mileage resetting
With “trip mileage recorder” selected
on the display, press key OK 4 until the
mileage recorder resets to zero.
Resetting the journey
parameters (reset button)
with the display showing one of the trip
settings, press key OK 4 until the dis-
play is reset to zero.
1.80
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (1/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected
101778 km
a) Total mileage and trip mileage recorder.
112.4 km
Middle
b) Journey parameters:
Average fuel consumption.
The value is displayed after having travelled at least 400 metres since the last
reset.
5.8 L/100
Current
Current fuel consumption.
Value displayed after reaching a speed, depending on the vehicle, from 6.2 mph
(10 km/h) to 18.6 mph (30 km/h).
7.4 L/100
1.81
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (2/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected
Range
b) Journey parameters (continued):
Estimated range with remaining fuel.
The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.
541 km
Distance
Distance travelled since last reset.
522 km
Middle
Average speed since the last reset.
The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.
123.4 km/H
55.8 mph (90 km/h)
c) Current speed.
1.82
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (3/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
Interpreting the display selected
On-board computer with mileage-
before-service message
d) Mileage before service or oil change.
Mileage before service
With the ignition switched on, the engine not running and
the display set to “Service Intervals”, press button OK for ap-
proximately 5 seconds to display the mileage before service (dis-
tance or time to the next service). When the range approaches
its limit, there are several possible scenarios:
– distance/time remaining less than 900 miles (1,500 km) or
one month: the message “Service due in” is displayed along
with the nearest limit (distance or time);
– range equal to 0 km/miles or service date reached: the
message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by
warning light
©.
The vehicle requires a service as soon as possible.
Service Intervals
Service in
30 000 Kms / 12 mo
Service due in
300 Kms / 24 days
Service required
Resetting: to reset the distance before service, press and hold button 2 for approximately 10 seconds until the display shows
the mileage permanently.
NB: if a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the
event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.
1.83
TRIP COMPUTER: trip settings (4/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
Interpreting the display selected
On-board computer with distance before
next service message (cntd.)
d) Mileage before service or oil change.
Mileage before service
With the ignition on, the engine not running and the display
selected “Reichweite bis zur Wartung”, press button OK for about
5 seconds to display the mileage before the next service, then
press button 2 to view the mileage before the next oil change
(distance or time remaining before the next service). When the
distance value approaches its limit, there are several possible
scenarios:
– distance/time remaining less than 900 miles (1,500 km) or
one month: the message “Service due in” is displayed, ac-
companied by the nearest term (distance or time);
– range equal to 0 km/miles or service date reached: the
message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by
warning light
©.
The vehicle requires an oil change as soon as possible.
Service Intervals
Oil change in
30 000 Kms / 24 mo
Service due in
300 Kms / 24 days
Service required
Depending on the vehicle, the mileage before an oil change varies according to the driving style (frequent driving at low speed,
door-to-door journeys, extensive use at idling speed, towing a trailer, etc.). The distance remaining until the next oil change can
therefore decrease more quickly in some cases than the actual distance travelled.
Resetting: to reset the mileage before a service, press and hold button 2 for approximately 10 seconds until the display shows
the range permanently.
NB: if a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the
event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.
1.84
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (5/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections Interpreting the display selected
e) Reset the tyre pressure.
Refer to the information on the “Tyre pressure
monitoring system” in Section 2.
+ Tyre pressure
No message
memorised
f) Trip log.
Successive display:
– information messages (passenger airbag OFF
etc.);
– operating fault messages (Check injection
system, etc.).
1.85
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: information messages
Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected
« Parking brake on » Indicates that the parking brake has been applied.
« Checking control
functions »
Displayed with the ignition on when the vehicle is running self-diagnostics.
« Turn steering
wheel + START »
Turn the steering wheel slightly whilst pressing the vehicle start button to unlock the steering
column.
« Steering wheel
not locked »
Indicates that the steering column has not been locked.
These can help in the vehicle starting phase, or give information about a selection or a driving status.
Examples of information messages are given in the following pages.
1.86
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: operating fault messages
These appear with the © warning light and mean that you should drive very carefully to an authorised dealer as
soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.
They disappear when the display selection key is pressed or after several seconds and are stored in the computer log. The
© warning light stays on. Examples of operating fault messages are given in the following pages.
Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected
« Clean diesel filter » Indicates the presence of water in the diesel filter; contact an approved Dealer
as soon as possible.
« Check lighting » Indicates a fault in the headlights.
« Check vehicle » Indicates a fault in one of the pedal sensors, battery management system or oil
level sensor.
« Check airbag » Indicates a fault in the restraint system in addition to the seat belts. In the event
of an accident, it is possible that they may not be triggered.
« Check anti-pollution system » Indicates a fault in the vehicle’s particle filter system.
1.87
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: warning message
These appear with the ® warning light and require you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traf-
fic conditions allow. Stop your engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.
Some examples of warning messages are given below. Note: the messages appear on the display either individually or al-
ternately (when there are several messages to be displayed), and may be accompanied by a warning light and/or a beep.
Examples of messages Interpreting the display selected
« Engine failure hazard » Indicates an injection fault, the vehicle’s engine has overheated or there is a
serious engine fault.
“Power steering fault” Indicates a fault in the steering system.
“Braking system fault” or ”Stop vehicle” Indicates a fault in the braking system. Apply the electronic parking brake ma-
nually and ensure that the vehicle is immobilised using a chock.
« Electric failure DANGER » Indicates a fault in the vehicle battery charging circuit (alternator etc.).
« Puncture » Indicates a puncture on the tyre displayed on the instrument panel.
1.88
VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU (1/2)
Adjusting the settings
Select the function to modify:
a) Unlock driver door only
b) Auto door lock while driving ;
c) Use handsfree card: open/close ;
d) Indicator sound volume ;
e) Internal welcome sound ;
f) External welcome ;
g) Automatic Cabin Light ;
h) Rear wiper when rear gear engaged ;
i) Driving style indicator ;
Depending on the function, select “ON"
or "OFF" to activate or disable it and "+"
or "-" to adjust the volume of the indi-
cators.
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
this function allows you to activate/de-
activate and adjust some of the vehi-
cle’s functions.
Vehicles fitted with a
navigation system
Accessing the settings menu
With the vehicle at a standstill, using
the multifunction screen 1, select menu
“Vehicle”, “User settings” to access the
various settings.
1
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
1.89
VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU (2/2)
3
4
Once a line has been selected, press
the switch 3 OK to adjust the function.
If you select either “PARKING ASSIST
VOLUME” or “LANGUAGE”, you will
have to make a further selection (sound
volume of the parking distance control
or instrument panel language). In this
case, make your selection and con-
firm it by holding the switch 3 OK – the
selected value is shown by a
~ in
front of the line.
To exit the menu, press the control 4
upwards or downwards. It may be nec-
essary to carry out this operation sev-
eral times.
Vehicles not fitted with a
navigation system
Accessing the settings menu on
display 2
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 3 OK to access the
settings menu.
Adjusting the settings
Browse using the control 4 to select the
function to adjust:
a) Auto door lock while driving ;
b) Unlock driver door only;
c) Rear wiper when rear gear engaged
;
d) Front park assist ;
e) Automaticmain beam lights ;
f) Lane departure warning : VOLUME ;
g) Lane departure warning : Sensitivity ;
h) Rear park assist ;
i) PARKING ASSIST VOLUME ;
j) LANGUAGE.
= function activated
< function deactivated
The vehicle settings personalisation
menu cannot be used when driv-
ing. At speed exceeding 12 mph
(20 km/h), the instrumental panel
display switches automatically back
to trip computer and warning system
mode.
2
1.90
External temperature
indicator
Special note:
When the exterior temperature is - 3 °C
to + 3 °C, the °C characters flash (sig-
nalling a risk of ice on the road).
The time and/or external tempera-
ture are displayed on the multifunc-
tion screen 1
Refer to the handbook for the equip-
ment.
CLOCK AND EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE
External temperature
indicator
As ice formation is related
to climatic exposure, local
air humidity and temperature, the
external temperature alone is not
sufficient to detect ice.
1
If the electrical supply is cut (battery
disconnected, broken supply wire,
etc.), the clock will automatically
go back to the right time after a few
minutes once the system is capable
of receiving information GPS.
1.91
STEERING WHEEL/POWER-ASSISTED STEERING
Power-assisted steering
Variable power-assisted steering
The variable power assisted steering
system is equipped with an electronic
control system which alters the level of
assistance to suit the vehicle speed.
Steering is made easier during parking
manoeuvres (for added comfort) while
the force needed to steer increases
progressively as the speed rises (for
enhanced safety at high speeds).
Special feature of Stop and Start
With the engine on standby, power-as-
sisted steering is no longer operational.
It returns to its original state when the
engine is restarted or when the speed
moves above 1 mph or 1 km/h (hill,
slope, etc.).
Adjusting the steering wheel
height and depth
Lower the lever 1 and position the
steering wheel in the required position.
Then, raise the lever fully, beyond the
point of resistance to lock the steering
wheel.
Make sure that the steering wheel is
correctly locked.
For safety reasons, only
adjust the steering wheel
when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Never leave the steering wheel at
full lock while stationary.
Do not switch off the engine
when driving downhill and,
as a general rule, when
driving (the power-assisted
steering and brake cannot operate
normally).
With the engine switched off, or if
there is a system fault, it is still pos-
sible to turn the steering wheel. The
force required will be greater.
1
Engine on standby - power-
assisted steering is no
longer operational.
NB: power-assisted steering depends
on the mode selected in the “Multi-
Sense” menu (please refer to the infor-
mation in “Multi-Sense” in Section 3).
1.92
Folding door mirrors
The door mirrors automatically fold in
when the vehicle is locked (switch 3 in
position B).
In any case, you can make the door
mirrors fold in (switch 3 in position C) or
fold out (switch 3 in position A).
Automatic mode is then deactivated. To
reactivate it, position switch 3 to B.
Welcome and goodbye function
(depending on the vehicle)
– From the multifunction screen, select
the “Vehicle” menu, then “User set-
tings”, “External welcome” and acti-
vate or deactivate the function (ON
or OFF);
or
– press and hold the 4 OK switch to
access the settings menu. Then
browse using control 5 to select the
“External welcome” menu.
DOOR MIRRORS (1/2)
Door mirrors
Adjustment
Select the door mirror using switch 2,
then use button 1 to adjust it to the de-
sired position.
Heated door mirrors
Mirror de-icing is carried out at the
same time as rear screen de-icing.
Please refer to the information
on “Manual air conditioning” and
“Automatic climate control”.
Objects observed in the
door mirror glass are actu-
ally closer than they appear.
For your safety, take this
into account in order to correctly
assess the distance before any ma-
noeuvre.
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
A
B
C
1
2
3
Depending on the selected choice, the
door mirrors will fold out:
– when the ignition is next switched on
(function deactivated);
– upon detecting the RENAULT card
or upon unlocking the vehicle (func-
tion activated).
5
4
1.93
Interior rear view mirror
Rear view mirror with lever 6
When driving at night, to avoid being
dazzled by the headlights of the vehicle
behind, depress the little lever located
behind rear view mirror 6.
Rear view mirror without lever 6
The rear-view mirror automatically
darkens when you are being followed
by a vehicle using main beam head-
lights or in very bright lighting.
DOOR MIRRORS (2/2)
Special feature:
When the rear-view mirror has been
manually deployed or folded back, it is
possible to reset it to a usage position.
To do this, position the switch 3 to C.
A mechanical noise from the rear-view
mirror unit will be heard.
If it is not the case, place switch 3 to A
and then place switch 3 to C until the
mechanical noise of the rear-view
mirror is heard.
A
C
3
Depending on the vehicle, informa-
tion regarding the activation and
deactivation of the front passen-
ger airbag is displayed on the inte-
rior rear-view mirror (please refer to
information on “Child safety: front
passenger airbag deactivation/acti-
vation” in Section 1).
6
1.94
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS
Horn
Press the steering wheel boss A to ac-
tivate the horn.
Headlight flasher
Pull stalk 1 towards you then release it
to flash the headlights.
é
Hazard warning lights
Press switch 2. This switch ac-
tivates all four direction indicators and
the side indicator lights simultaneously.
It must only be used in an emergency to
warn drivers of other vehicles that you
have had to stop in an area where stop-
ping is prohibited or unexpected or that
you are obliged to drive under special
conditions.
Depending on the vehicle, the hazard
warning lights may come on automati-
cally under heavy deceleration. You can
switch them off by pressing switch 2.
Direction indicators
Move stalk 1 parallel to the steering
wheel and in the direction you are going
to turn it.
One-touch mode
When driving, it is possible that the
steering wheel may not be turned suf-
ficiently to return the stalk automatically
to its starting position.
In this case, briefly turn stalk 1 to the in-
termediate position, then release it: the
stalk returns to its original point and the
indicator light flashes three times.
2
A
1
1.95
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (1/6)
á
Main beam headlights
With the dipped beam
headlights lit, push stalk 1. This indica-
tor light on the instrument panel comes
on.
To return to the dipped headlight posi-
tion, pull the stalk 1 towards you again.
š
Side lights
Turn ring 3 until the symbol is
opposite mark 2. This indicator light on
the instrument panel comes on.
k
Dipped beam
headlights
Manual operation
Turn ring 3 until the symbol is opposite
mark 2. This indicator light on the in-
strument panel comes on.
Automatic operation
Turn ring 3 until the AUTO symbol is op-
posite mark 2: with the engine running,
the dipped beam headlights switch on
or off automatically depending on the
brightness of the light outside, without
any action on stalk 1.
Depending on the vehicle, the dipped
beam headlights come on automati-
cally after several sweeps of the wind-
screen wiper blades.
Before driving at night:
check that the electrical
equipment is operating cor-
rectly. As a general precau-
tion, check that the lights are not
obscured (by dirt, mud, snow or ob-
jects being transported).
1
3
2
1
1.96
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (2/6)
Automatic main beam
headlights
Depending on the vehicle, this system
switches the main beam headlights on
and off automatically. It uses a camera
located behind the interior rear-view
mirror to detect vehicles that are being
followed and those coming in the oppo-
site direction.
The main beam headlights come on au-
tomatically if:
– exterior light is weak;
– no other vehicles or lighting are de-
tected;
– the vehicle speed is above approxi-
mately 25 mph (40 km/h).
If any of the above conditions are not
fulfilled, the system switches to dipped
beam headlights.
The “automatic main beam
headlights” system should
under no circumstances be
used to replace driver atten-
tion and responsibility with regard
to vehicle lighting and adapting to
light, visibility and traffic conditions.
The system may encounter difficul-
ties under certain conditions, inclu-
ding:
– extreme weather conditions (rain,
snow, fog, etc.);
– obstruction in front of the wind-
screen or camera;
– when a following or oncoming ve-
hicle has weak or hidden lighting;
– incorrect settings for the front
headlights;
– reflective systems;
– ...
Switching on
Vehicle fitted with a navigation
system
From the multifunction screen 4, select
the “Vehicle” menu, then “Driving as-
sistance”, “Automaticmain beam lights”
then choose “ON” or “OFF”.
4
1.97
3
2
1
Vehicles without a navigation
system
– With the vehicle stationary, press
and hold the OK switch 5 to access
the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control 6 up
or down until you reach the “Driving
assistance” menu. Press the OK
switch 5;
5
6
– repeatedly press control 6 up or down
until you reach the “Automaticmain
beam lights” menu, then press the
OK switch 5;
– press the OK switch 5 again to acti-
vate or deactivate the function.
Activation/deactivation
To activate automatic main beam
headlights:
– turn ring 3 until the AUTO symbol is
opposite mark 2;
– push stalk 1.
Warning light
comes on the in-
strument panel.
To deactivate automatic main beam
headlights:
– pull stalk 1 towards you;
– or turn ring 3 to a position other than
AUTO.
Warning light
goes out on the in-
strument panel.
Note: make sure the windscreen is not
obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensa-
tion etc.).
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (3/6)
Each time you start the engine, pull
and then push the stalk 1 to reacti-
vate the system.
1.98
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (4/6)
Using the portable naviga-
tion system at night in the
windscreen area below the
camera may disturb the op-
eration of the “automatic main beam
headlights” system (risk of reflection
on the windscreen).
Automatic main beam
headlights (continued)
Operating faults
When the message “Check auto li-
ghting” appears on the instrument
panel, the system is deactivated.
Consult an approved dealer.
Operating faults
When the message “Check lighting”
with warning light
© is displayed
and warning light
k flashes on the
instrument panel, this indicates that
there is a lighting fault.
Consult an approved dealer.
Switching off the lights
There are two possibilities:
– manually, move ring 3 to position 0;
– automatically, the lights will go out
when the engine is switched off, the
driver’s door is opened or the vehicle
is locked. In this case, the next time
the engine is started the lights will be
switched back on according to the
position of the ring 3.
Lights-on reminder buzzer
A warning beep sounds when the driv-
er’s door is opened to warn you that the
lights are still on.
Daytime running lights
function
The daytime running lights come on
automatically with no action on stalk 1
when the engine is started, and they go
off once the engine is switched off.
3
1
1.99
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (5/6)
“See-me-home lighting”
function
This function allows you to briefly switch
on the dipped beam headlights (to pro-
vide light when opening a gate, etc.).
With the engine and lights switched
off and the ring 3 in position 0 or
AUTO, pull the stalk 1 towards you: the
dipped beam headlights come on for
approximately 30 seconds. To increase
this duration, you may pull the stalk up
to four times (total time restricted to ap-
proximately two minutes). The mes-
sage “Follow-me home for _ _ _” along
with the time the lights will be on for is
displayed on the instrument panel to
confirm this action. You can then lock
your vehicle.
To switch off the lights before they go
out automatically, turn ring 3 to any po-
sition, then return it to the AUTO posi-
tion .
Welcome and goodbye
function
(depending on the vehicle)
Once the function is activated, the day-
time running lights and the rear side
light light up automatically upon detect-
ing the RENAULT card or when the ve-
hicle is unlocked.
They switch off automatically:
– approximately one minute after li-
ghting up;
– when starting the engine based on
the position of the lighting stalk;
or
– upon locking the vehicle.
Welcome lighting under the door
mirrors
With the function activated, the lights
located under the door mirrors come
on automatically upon detection of the
RENAULT card, upon unlocking the
vehicle or when opening a door.
They switch off automatically:
– approximately one minute after li-
ghting up;
– upon starting the engine;
or
– upon locking the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating the function
From the multifunction screen, select
menu “vehicle”, “User settings” then
“External welcome”. Choose “ON”
or “OFF” to activate or deactivate the
function.
1.100
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (6/6)
f
Rear fog lights
Turn centre ring 7 on the stalk
until the symbol faces mark 2, then re-
lease it.
Operation of the fog lights depends on
the exterior lighting selected, and an in-
dicator light will light up on the instru-
ment panel.
Do not forget to switch off the fog lights
when they are no longer needed, to
avoid inconveniencing other road
users.
Switching off the lights
Turn the ring 7 again until the mark 2
is opposite the symbol for the fog light
that you wish to switch off. The corre-
sponding indicator light on the instru-
ment panel goes out.
The fog lights switch off when the exte-
rior lights are switched off.
Cornering lights
(depending on vehicle)
Whenever the dipped beam headlights
are on and under certain conditions (at
speed, the steering wheel at an angle,
in forward gear, the indicator lights on,
etc.), when taking a corner one of the
front fog lights will come on to light the
inside of the bend.
When driving in fog or snow, or
when transporting objects which are
higher than the roof, the headlights
do not come on automatically.
Switching on the fog lights remains
the responsibility of the driver: the
indicator lights on the instrument
panel inform you whether the fog
lights are lit (indicator light on) or not
(indicator light not on).
7
2
g
Front fog lights
Turn centre ring 7 on stalk 1
until the symbol faces mark 2, then re-
lease it.
Operation of the fog lights depends on
the exterior lighting position selected,
and an indicator light will light up on the
instrument panel.
1
1.101
HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT
On vehicles fitted with this function,
control A allows you to adjust the height
of the beams according to the load.
Turn control A downwards to lower the
headlights and upwards to raise them.
A
For vehicles not fitted with a con-
trol A, the headlight adjustment is
automatic, depending on the vehi-
cle load.
For manual settings
Examples of positions for adjusting control A according to the load
0 Driver alone or with front passenger
1
Driver with one front passenger and two or three rear
passengers
2 Do not use
3
Driver with a full car of passengers and luggage (or load)
reaching the maximum permissible all-up weight
3 and 4
Driver with luggage (or load) reaching the maximum
permissible all-up weight
1.102
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (1/6)
Special note
When driving the vehicle, the wiping
speed slows down whenever the ve-
hicle stops. For example, fast wiping
speed will slow to normal wiping speed.
As soon as the vehicle moves off,
wiping will return to the speed originally
selected.
If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and
cancels the automatic function.
Vehicle fitted with intermittent
windscreen wipers
A single sweep
A short push will trigger one sweep
of the wipers.
B stop
C intermittent wiping
The wipers will pause for several
seconds between sweeps. It is
possible to change the time be-
tween sweeps by turning ring 2.
D slow continuous wiping
E fast continuous wiping
1
1
A
B
C
D
2
Check the condition of the wiper
blades. You are responsible for their
service life:
– they must remain clean: clean
the blades, windscreen and
rear screen regularly with soapy
water;
– do not use them when the wind-
screen or rear screen are dry;
– free them from the windscreen or
rear screen when they have not
been used for a long time.
In all cases, replace them as soon
as they begin to lose efficiency: ap-
proximately once a year.
Before using the windscreen wiper,
check that no objects are obstruct-
ing the travel of the blade.
E
Positions A, C and D are accessible
with the ignition on. Position E is
accessible only when the engine is
running.
1.103
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (2/6)
1
F
2
Vehicle fitted with front
windscreen wiper rain sensor
The rain sensor is located on the winds-
creen, in front of the interior rear-view
mirror.
A single sweep
A short push will trigger one sweep
of the wipers.
B stop
C automatic wiper function
When this position is selected, the
system detects water on the wind-
screen and triggers the wipers at a
suitable wiping speed. It is possi-
ble to change the triggering thresh-
old and the time sweeps by turning
ring 2:
– F : minimum sensitivity
– G : maximum sensitivity
The higher the sensitivity, the quic-
ker the wipers will react and the
faster the wipe.
When activating automatic wiping or
when increasing sensitivity, one sweep
of the blades is performed.
Note:
– the rain sensor is only intended as a
driving aid. In the event of reduced
visibility, the driver should manually
activate the wipers. In foggy weather
or during snowfalls, wiping is not au-
tomatically triggered and remains
under the driver’s control;
– in the event of temperatures below
zero, automatic wiping is not acti-
vated when the vehicle is started. It
is automatically activated as soon as
the vehicle exceeds a certain speed
(approximately 5 mph (8 km/h));
– do not activate automatic wiping in
dry weather;
– fully de-ice the windscreen before
activating automatic wiping.
G
1
A
B
C
D
E
1.104
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (3/6)
D slow continuous wiping
E fast continuous wiping
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the au-
tomatic wiping, the wiper is set to inter-
mittent wiping. Contact an authorised
dealer.
The operation of the rain sensor can be
disturbed in the event of:
– damaged windscreen wiper blades;
a film of water or traces left by a
blade in the sensor’s detection zone
may increase the response time of
the automatic wiper, or increase the
wiping frequency;
– a windscreen with any chip or crack
level with the sensor, or a windscreen
covered in dust, dirt, insects, ice, the
use of washing wax and water-repel-
lent chemicals; the windscreen wiper
will be less sensitive or may even not
react at all.
Special note
When driving the vehicle, the wiping
speed slows down whenever the vehi-
cle stops. For example, fast wiping
speed will slow to normal wiping speed.
As soon as the vehicle moves off,
wiping will return to the speed originally
selected.
If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and
cancels the automatic function.
Precautions
– In the event of ice, check whether the
blades are stuck to the windscreen
before operating the wiping mecha-
nism. If you activate the wipers while
the blades are stuck down with ice,
you may risk damaging both the
blade and the wiper motor.
– Do not activate the wipers on a dry
screen. This will lead to the prema-
ture wear or damage to the blades.
Positions A and D are accessible
with the ignition on. Positions C
and E are accessible only with the
engine running.
1
A
B
C
D
E
1.105
Before any action involving
the windscreen (washing
the vehicle, de-icing,
cleaning the windscreen,
etc.) return stalk 1 to position B
(stop).
Risk of injury and/or damage.
In the event of obstacles present
on the windscreen (dirt, snow, ice,
etc.), clean the windscreen (inclu-
ding the central area located behind
the interior rear-view mirror) and
the rear screen before starting the
wipers (risk of motor overheating).
If an object is preventing a blade
from moving, it may stop functio-
ning. Remove the obstacle and
reactivate the wiper using the wiper
stalk.
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (4/6)
Note:
Once the wipers have been switched
off, at least 1 minute after locking the
vehicle, it is possible to manually move
the blades. Do not force the blade arms
to move. This may risk damage to the
wiper motor, the arms and the blades.
After your intervention, to reposition the
blades correctly, make sure the blades
are resting on the windscreen, switch
on the ignition and activate the wiper
control.
The blade on the driver’s side must
always be above the passenger blade.
If this is not the case, a quick sweep of
the windscreen wipers should be per-
formed once the vehicle is travelling at
over 4 mph (7 km/h).
Specific front wiper position
(service position)
This position enables the blades to be
lifted to remove them from the winds-
creen.
This can be useful:
– to clean the blades;
– to release the blades from the winds-
creen in winter;
– to replace the blades (please refer
to the information on the “Wiper
blades” in Section 5).
With the ignition on and the engine off,
lower the windscreen wiper stalk to
position E (fast continuous wipe). The
wiper arms stop in a position away from
the bonnet.
To return the blades to position, make
sure they have been placed on the
windscreen, then move the stalk to po-
sition B (stop) with the ignition on.
Before switching on the ignition,
place the wipers on the windscreen.
Otherwise, there may a risk of damage
to the bonnet or the wipers when they
are switched on.
1.106
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (5/6)
Note:
In temperatures below zero, the washer
liquid risks freezing to the windscreen,
thereby reducing visibility. Heat the
windscreen using the demister control
before cleaning.
Windscreen washer
With the ignition on, pull stalk 1 then
release.
A brief pull will trigger a single sweep
of the wipers, in addition to the wind-
screen washer.
A longer pull will trigger three sweeps
of the wipers followed, a few seconds
later, by a fourth, in addition to the wind-
screen washer.
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in position B (stop).
Risk of injury.
1
A
B
C
D
E
1.107
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (6/6)
Note:
To ensure the headlight washers op-
erate correctly in winter, remove snow
from the jet trims and de-ice the jet
trims using an aerosol de-icer.
You are recommended to regularly
remove dirt encrusted on the headlight
glass.
When the windscreen washer fluid level
reaches minimum:
– the message “Windscreen wash fluid
shortage” is displayed on the instru-
ment panel;
– the headlight washer system may be
deprimed.
Fill the windscreen washer fluid and
then activate the windscreen washer,
with the engine running, to reprime
the system.
Headlight washers
Headlights on
On vehicles fitted with this, with the
engine running, hold stalk 1 pulled to-
wards you for about 2 seconds: the
headlight washers and windscreen
washers will be activated at the same
time.
The headlight washers are also acti-
vated after three prolonged movements
on the front windscreen washer control.
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in position B (stop).
Risk of injury.
1
A
B
C
D
E
1.108
REAR SCREEN WASH/WIPE (1/2)
1
3
Check the condition of the wiper
blades. You are responsible for their
service life:
– they must remain clean: clean
the blades, windscreen and
rear screen regularly with soapy
water;
– do not use them when the wind-
screen or rear screen are dry;
– free them from the windscreen or
rear screen when they have not
been used for a long time.
In all cases, replace them as soon
as they begin to lose efficiency: ap-
proximately once a year.
Before using the rear wiper, check
that no object obstructs the travel of
the blade.
Do not use the wiper arm to open or
close the tailgate.
Y
Rear screen wiper
With the ignition on, turn ring 3
on stalk 1 to align the symbol with
mark 2.
– stop;
– intermittent wiping.
The wipers will pause for several
seconds between sweeps. Wiping
frequency varies with vehicle
speed;
– slow continuous wiping.
To stop operation, twist the ring 3 again
to the off position.
Note:
When washing using a roller type car
wash, return the ring 3 on the stalk 1
to the stop position to deactivate auto-
matic wiping.
Follow usage recommendations.
Before any action involving
the rear screen (washing
the vehicle, de-icing, clean-
ing, etc.) return stalk 1 to
the stop position.
Risk of injury and/or damage.
2
1.109
Activation/deactivation of the rear
screen wiper
Engaging reverse gear triggers inter-
mittent wiping (if the front wipers are in
operation). If your vehicle is fitted with
a vehicle settings customisation menu,
you can opt to activate or deactivate
this function. To do this, refer to the in-
formation on the “Vehicle settings cus-
tomisation menu” in Section 1; “Rear
wiping in reverse gear”.
For vehicles not fitted with a settings
customisation menu, you can have this
function deactivated by an authorised
dealer.
REAR SCREEN WASH/WIPE (2/2)
p
Rear screen wash/wipe
With the ignition on, push and
hold stalk 1, then release.
A longer action will trigger three sweeps
of the wipers followed, a few seconds
later, by a fourth, in addition to the wind-
screen washer.
In the event of obstacles present on the
rear window (dirt, snow, etc.), the wiper
will try to sweep away all the obstacles.
If an obstacle prevents the blade from
moving, it can be stopped. Remove the
obstacle, wait for around 30 seconds
and reactivate the wiper using the wiper
stalk.
Precautions
– In the event of ice, check whether
the blades are stuck to the wind-
screen before operating the wiping
mechanism. If you activate the wiper
while the blade is blocked by ice, you
risk damaging both the blade and the
wiping motor.
– Do not activate the wipers on a dry
screen. This will lead to premature
wear or damage to the blades.
1
1.110
FUEL TANK (1/3)
Useable fuel tank capacity:
approximately 11.22 gallons (51 litres)
or 11.66 gallons (53 litres), depending
on the vehicle.
With the vehicle unlocked, to open
cover 1, press area A then release. The
cover 1 opens.
Valve 2 is integrated into the filler pipe.
For details on filling the fuel tank, refer
to the information on “Filling with fuel”.
To close it, press on the fuel filler flap by
hand, as far as it will go.
Fuel grade
Use a high-grade fuel that complies
with the legislation in force in each
country and which must comply with
the specifications given on the label
on the cover 1. Please refer to the in-
formation on “Engine specifications” in
Section 6.
Never press valve 2 with
your fingers.
Do not wash the filler
area with a high-pressure
washer.
Do not mix even small
amounts of petrol (un-
leaded or E85) with diesel.
Do not use ethanol-based
fuel if your vehicle is not compatible
with this fuel.
Do not add additive to the fuel –
otherwise you risk damaging the
engine.
Diesel versions
Only use diesel fuel which complies
with the information on the label located
inside the cover 1.
Petrol versions
It is essential to use unleaded petrol.
The octane rating (RON) must comply
with the information given on the label
on the cover 1. Refer to Section 6 for
information on “Engine specifications”.
1
A
2
1
1.111
FUEL TANK (2/3)
Filling with fuel
Insert the nozzle to open the valve 2
and insert it fully before turning it on to
fill the fuel tank (risk of splashing).
Keep the nozzle in this position through-
out the entire filling operation.
When the pump cuts out automatically
at the end of the filling procedure, a
maximum of two further filling attempts
may be made, as there must be suffi-
cient space in the fuel tank to allow for
expansion.
Make sure that no water enters the fuel
tank during filling. The valve 2 and its
surround must remain clean.
2
Petrol versions
Using leaded petrol will damage the
antipollution system and may lead to a
loss of warranty.
To ensure that the fuel tank is not filled
with leaded petrol, the fuel tank filler
neck consists of a restrictor fitted with
a safety system which only allows
a nozzle for unleaded petrol to be
used (at the pump).
Vehicle fitted with the Stop and
Start function
To fill up with fuel, the engine must
be stopped (and not on standby):
stop the engine (Please See
“Starting, stopping the engine” in
Section 2).
1.112
FUEL TANK (3/3)
Persistent smell of
fuel
If you notice a persistent
smell of fuel you should:
– stop the vehicle as soon as traf-
fic conditions allow and switch off
the ignition;
– switch on the hazard warning
lights and ask your passengers
to leave the vehicle and to keep
away from traffic;
– contact an authorised dealer.
Vehicles with RENAULT card
With the card RENAULT in the pas-
senger compartment, press the start
button 3 without pressing any of the
pedals. Wait a few minutes before start-
ing. This will enable the fuel circuit to
be primed. If the engine does not start,
repeat the procedure.
If the engine does not start after several
attempts, please contact an authorised
dealer.
No modifications what-
soever are permitted on
any part of the fuel supply
system (electronic units,
wiring, fuel circuit, injectors, pro-
tective covers, etc.) as this may be
dangerous (unless undertaken by
qualified Network personnel).
3
Running out of fuel on diesel
versions
Vehicles with key/remote control
– Put the ignition key in “On” posi-
tion M (please see the information
on the “Ignition switch” in Section
2) and wait for a few minutes before
starting, to enable the fuel circuit to
be primed;
– turn the key to position D. If the
engine does not start, repeat the pro-
cedure.
– If the engine does not start after sev-
eral attempts, please contact an au-
thorised dealer.
2.1
Section 2: Driving
(Advice on use relating to fuel economy and the environment)
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Starting, stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Stop and Start Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
Special features of petrol versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12
Special features of diesel versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13
The Hybrid Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14
Gear lever/Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20
Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21
Driving advice, ECO-driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24
Maintenance and antipollution advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31
Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.32
Driver correction devices/aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.35
Active emergency braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.40
Lane departure warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.47
Lane Keeping Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.51
Blind spot warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.55
Safe distance alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.59
Fatigue detection warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.62
Speeding alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64
Speed limiter/cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.67
Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.74
Parking distance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.82
Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.87
Assisted parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.89
Automatic gearbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93
2.2
RUNNING IN
Petrol version
Up to 600 miles (1 000 km), do not
exceed 78 mph (130 km/h) in top gear
or 3,000 to 3,500 rpm.
You may only expect top performance
from your vehicle after approximately
1,800 miles (3 000 km).
Service interval: refer to the
Maintenance Document for your vehi-
cle.
Diesel version
For the first 900 miles (1 500 km), do
not exceed 2,500 rpm. After complet-
ing this mileage you may drive faster,
however, it is only after approximately
3600 miles (6 000 km) that you may
reasonably expect full performance.
During the running in period, do not ac-
celerate hard while the engine is still
cold and do not let the engine over-rev.
Service interval: refer to the
Maintenance Document for your vehi-
cle.
2.3
IGNITION SWITCH: vehicle with key
“Ignition” position ON 2
The ignition is switched on: Any acces-
sories (radio etc.) can be used.
“Start” position START 3
If the engine fails to start at the first
attempt, the key must be turned back
before the starter can be activated
again. Release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
Note: on diesel versions, several sec-
onds may pass between turning the
key and the engine starting to allow for
engine preheating.
Ignition switch
Off position LOCK 0 (steering lock
applied)
To lock: remove the key and turn the
steering wheel until the steering column
locks.
To unlock: turn the key and the steering
wheel slightly.
2.4
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with key
Starting the engine
Petrol versions
– Activate the starter without ac-
celerating;
– release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
É
Diesel versions
– Turn the ignition key to the “ON”
position 2 and hold this position
until the engine preheating light
goes off;
– turn the key to the start position
“START” 3 without pressing the
accelerator;
– release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
Special note: if starting the engine
when the outdoor temperature is very
low (below - 10 ° C): hold down the
clutch pedal until the engine starts.
Stopping the engine
With the engine idling, turn the key to
the “LOCK” position 0.
Never start your vehicle
while freewheeling on a
gradient. Risk of non-ac-
tivation of power-assisted
steering.
There is a risk of accidents.
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
Never switch off the igni-
tion before the vehicle has
stopped completely. Once
the engine has stopped, the
brake servo, power-assisted steer-
ing, etc., and the passive safety de-
vices such as the airbags and pre-
tensioners will no longer operate.
2.5
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT card (1/3)
The RENAULT card must be inserted in
detection zone 1.
To start:
– vehicles with an automatic gearbox,
place the lever in position P, depress
the brake pedal and press button 2;
– vehicles with a manual gearbox,
depress the brake or clutch pedal
and press the button 2. If a gear is
engaged, the vehicle may only be
started by depressing the clutch
pedal.
“Hands-free” starting with
the tailgate open
In this case, the RENAULT card should
not be located in the boot, to avoid any
risk of loss.
2
1
Special features
– If one of starting conditions is not ap-
plied, the message “Press brake +
START” or “Press clutch + START”
or “Select P” is displayed on the in-
strument panel;
– in some cases, it will be necessary to
move the steering wheel while press-
ing start button 1 to assist in unlock-
ing the steering column. A message
on the instrument panel “Turn steer-
ing wheel + START” warns of this.
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
2.6
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT card (2/3)
Depress the brake or clutch pedal, then
place the RENAULT 3 card (logo side)
in contact with the start button 2 for
around 2 seconds. Press the 2 button
to start the vehicle. The message goes
out.
2
Accessories function
(switching on the ignition)
Once you have gained access to your
vehicle, you may use some of its func-
tions (radio, navigation, wipers, etc.).
To use the other functions, with the
RENAULT card in the passenger com-
partment, press button 2 without press-
ing the pedals.
3
Operating faults
In certain cases, the RENAULT “hands-
free” card may not work:
– when the RENAULT card battery is
drained, etc.;
– near to appliances operating on the
same frequency as the card (moni-
tor, mobile phone, video game, etc.);
– vehicle located in a high electromag-
netic radiation zone.
The message “Place card close START
and push” appears on the instrument
panel.
2.7
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT card (3/3)
Conditions for stopping the
engine
The vehicle must be stationary, with the
lever positioned in P for vehicles with
an automatic gearbox.
With the RENAULT card in the vehicle,
press the 2 button: the engine will stop.
The steering column is locked when the
driver’s door is opened or the vehicle
is locked.
When you leave your vehi-
cle, especially if you have
your RENAULT card with
you, check that the engine
is completely switched off.
2
If the RENAULT card is no longer in the
passenger compartment when you try
to switch the engine off, the message
“No keycard Press and hold” appears
on the instrument panel: press button 2
for longer than two seconds. If the card
is no longer in the passenger compart-
ment, make sure you can retrieve it
before pressing and holding the button.
Without the RENAULT, card, you will
not be able to start.
With the engine switched off, any ac-
cessories being used (radio, etc.) will
continue to function for approximately
10 minutes.
When the driver’s door is opened, the
accessories stop working.
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-suffi-
cient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the tempera-
ture inside the passenger compart-
ment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
Never switch off the igni-
tion before the vehicle has
stopped completely. Once
the engine has stopped, the
brake servo, power-assisted steer-
ing, etc., and the passive safety de-
vices such as the airbags and pre-
tensioners will no longer operate.
2.8
FUNCTION STOP AND START (1/4)
If the engine is put in
standby, the electronic
parking brake (depending
on the vehicle) is not ap-
plied automatically.
Engine on standby - braking
assistance is no longer op-
erational.
If the engine stalls while the system is in operation, pressing the clutch pedal right
down will start it again.
Engine on standby - power-
assisted steering is no
longer operational.
Keep your vehicle station-
ary when the engine is
on standby (shown by the
warning light
on the
instrument panel).
For manual gearboxes:
– the gearbox is in neutral;
– and the clutch pedal is released. If
the warning light
flashes, this
means that the clutch pedal is not
sufficiently released;
– and the vehicle speed is less than
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
For all vehicles:
The warning light
on the instru-
ment panel is lit when the engine is on
standby. The vehicle equipment re-
mains operational while the engine is
stopped.
Depending on the vehicle, when the
engine switches to standby, the steer-
ing assistance may no longer be opera-
tional.
In this case it becomes operational
again when the engine is no longer on
standby or the speed exceeds approxi-
mately 0.62 mph (1 km/h) (downhill,
slope etc.).
This system enables a reduced fuel
consumption and lower greenhouse
gas emissions.
The system is activated automati-
cally when the vehicle is started. While
driving, the system stops the engine
(standby) when the vehicle is at a
standstill (traffic jam, traffic lights, etc).
Conditions for engine
standby
The vehicle has set off from where it
was parked;
For automatic gearboxes:
– the gearbox is in position D, M or N;
– and the brake pedal is pressed (suf-
ficiently hard);
– and the accelerator pedal is not
pressed;
– and the speed is zero for around
1 second.
The engine remains on standby if posi-
tion P is selected, or if position N is se-
lected with the handbrake engaged and
the brake pedal released.
Before leaving the vehicle,
the engine must be stopped
and not put on standby
(please see the information
on “Starting, stopping the engine”).
2.9
To fill up with fuel, the engine must
be stopped (and not on standby):
switch the ignition off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
FUNCTION STOP AND START (2/4)
Preventing the engine from
standing by
In certain situations, such as negotiat-
ing a crossroads for instance, it is pos-
sible to keep the engine running so as
to be ready to move off quickly.
For vehicles equipped with auto-
matic gearboxes:
Keep the vehicle stationary without
pressing too hard on the brake pedal.
For vehicles equipped with manual
gearboxes:
Keep the clutch pedal pressed right
down.
Conditions for coming out of
engine standby
For automatic gearboxes:
– the brake pedal is released, posi-
tion D or M engaged;
– or the brake pedal is released, po-
sition N engaged and the parking
brake off;
– or the brake pedal is pressed again,
with position P engaged or posi-
tion N engaged with the parking
brake applied;
– or position R is engaged;
– or the accelerator pedal is pressed;
– or in manual mode the gear lever is
moved towards + or -.
For manual gearboxes:
– the gearbox is in neutral and the
clutch pedal is slightly depressed, or
– the engine is in gear and the clutch
pedal is pressed right down.
Special note: depending on the vehi-
cle, if you switch off the ignition when
the engine is on standby, the warning
light
Ä is displayed for a few sec-
onds on the instrument panel.
2.10
FUNCTION STOP AND START (3/4)
Conditions preventing the
standby of the engine
Certain conditions prevent the system
from using the engine standby function,
including when:
for vehicles equipped with a
RENAULT card:
– the driver’s door is not closed;
– the driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
for all vehicles:
– reverse gear is engaged;
– the bonnet is not locked;
– the outdoor temperature is too low or
too high (less than around 0 °C or
higher than around 30 °C);
– one of the two batteries is not suffi-
ciently charged;
– the difference between the vehicle
interior temperature and the auto-
matic climate control instruction is
too high;
– parking distance control is in opera-
tion;
– for vehicles with automatic gear-
boxes, the gradient is steeper than
approximately 12%;
– the “Clear View” function is activated
(please see “Automatic climate con-
trol” in Section 3);
– the engine temperature is too low;
– the emission control system is being
regenerated;
– ...
Warning light
is displayed on the
instrument panel. This notifies you that
engine standby is not available.
Deactivate the Stop and
Start function for any opera-
tion performed in the engine
compartment.
Special case for vehicles with
a RENAULT card
With the engine on standby (traffic jam,
traffic lights, etc.), if the driver unfas-
tens the seat belt and opens the driv-
er’s door, or gets out of the seat, the
ignition is switched off.
The assisted parking brake is applied
automatically.
To restart and reactivate the Stop and
Start system, start the engine (please
refer to the information on “Starting,
stopping the engine” in Section 2).
Special case of vehicles with
a key
With the engine on standby (traffic
jam, traffic lights, etc.), if you get out of
the vehicle, a beep warns you that the
engine is on standby and has not been
stopped.
2.11
FUNCTION STOP AND START (4/4)
Special feature of the automatic
engine re-start
Under certain conditions, the engine
can restart on its own in order to guar-
antee your safety and comfort.
This can occur especially when:
– the outdoor temperature is too low or
too high (less than around 0 °C or
higher than around 30 °C);
– the “Clear View” function is activated
(please see “Automatic climate con-
trol” in Section 3);
– the battery is not sufficiently charged;
– the vehicle speed is above 3 mph
(5 km/h) (downhill slope, etc.);
– repeated pressing on the brake
pedal or braking system require-
ment;
– ...
1
2
Deactivating, activating the
function
Press switch 1 to deactivate the func-
tion. The message “Stop & Start deac-
tivated” will appear on the instrument
panel and the integrated warning light 2
on the switch will light up.
Pressing again will reactivate the
system. The message “Stop & Start ac-
tivated” will appear on the instrument
panel and the integrated warning light 2
on switch 1 will go out.
Special note: with the engine on
standby, press switch 1 to automati-
cally restart the engine.
The system is automatically reacti-
vated each time the vehicle is started
(see “Starting, stopping the engine” in
Section 2).
Operating faults
When the message “Check Stop &
Start” appears on the instrument panel
and the integrated warning light 2 lights
up on the switch 1, the system is deac-
tivated.
Please consult an authorised dealer.
Special feature of vehicles with
a key: for some of these condi-
tions the automatic restarting of the
engine is inhibited if a front door is
open.
Before leaving the vehicle,
the engine must be stopped
and not put on standby
(please see the information
on “Starting, stopping the engine”).
2.12
SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS
Do not park the vehicle or
run the engine in locations
where combustible sub-
stances or materials such
as grass or leaves can come into
contact with the hot exhaust system.
The following operating conditions
should be avoided:
– driving for long periods when the low
fuel level warning light is lit;
– using leaded petrol;
– using fuel or lubrication additives
which are not approved.
Or operating faults such as:
– faulty ignition, running out of fuel or
disconnected spark plugs resulting
in the engine misfiring or cutting out
when driving;
– loss of power,
may cause the catalytic converter to
overheat, reducing its efficiency which
may irreparably damage it and cause
heat damage to the vehicle.
If you notice any of the above operating
faults, have the necessary repairs car-
ried out as soon as possible by an ap-
proved dealer.
These faults may be avoided by regu-
larly taking your vehicle to an approved
Dealer at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Document.
Starting problems
To avoid damaging the catalytic con-
verter, do not keep trying to start the
engine (using the start button, or by
pushing or towing the vehicle) without
having identified and corrected the
cause of the fault.
2.13
SPECIAL FEATURES OF DIESEL VERSIONS
Diesel engine speed
Diesel engines are fitted with injection
equipment which prevents the engine
speed being exceeded irrespective of
the gear selected.
If the message “Check anti-pollution
system” is displayed along with warning
lights
Ä and ©, consult an au-
thorised dealer immediately.
When driving, depending on the fuel
grade used, it is possible that white
smoke may be emitted.
This is due to the exhaust particle filter
being cleaned automatically, and does
not affect the way the vehicle runs.
Do not park the vehicle or
run the engine in locations
where combustible sub-
stances or materials such
as grass or leaves can come into
contact with the hot exhaust system.
Precautions to be taken in
winter
To avoid any faults in icy weather:
– ensure that the battery is always fully
charged,
– always keep the diesel tank rela-
tively full to avoid water vapour con-
densing in it and accumulating at the
bottom of the tank.
2.14
1 48 V traction battery
2 Orange electrical power cables
3 Voltage converter
4 Electric motor
5 Combustion engine with secondary
12 V battery
“HYBRID ASSIST" SYSTEM: introduction (1/5)
1
3
4
2
5
5 Seater version (short or long chassis)
2.15
1 48 V traction battery
2 Orange electrical power cables
3 Voltage converter
4 Electric motor
5 Combustion engine with secondary
12 V battery
“HYBRID ASSIST" SYSTEM: introduction (2/5)
7-seater version
1
2
3
4
5
2.16
The “Hybrid Assist” system uses an
electric motor to improve performance
of the combustion engine (acceleration,
starting on a slope etc.). The vehicle
has more acceleration torque available
while consuming less fuel.
Batteries
Your electric vehicle has two types of
battery:
– a 48 V traction battery;
– secondary 12 V battery.
“48 volt” traction battery
Located under the rear floor, this bat-
tery stores the energy recovered during
phases of deceleration. This energy is
used by the hybrid system to provide
additional torque to the combustion
engine.
“HYBRID ASSIST" SYSTEM: introduction (3/5)
Secondary 12V battery
The 12 V battery supplies the energy
required to operate vehicle equipment
(lights, windscreen wipers, ABS etc).
Please refer to the information on the
“Battery” in Section 4.
“48 volt” electrical circuit
The 48 V electrical circuit is denoted
by orange cables and parts bearing the
symbol
ṑ.
All interventions or modi-
fications to the vehicle’s
48 volt electrical system
(components, cables, con-
nectors, traction battery) are strictly
prohibited due to the risks this may
present to your safety. Call an ap-
proved Dealer.
Risk of electric shock.
A
The A symbol denotes the electrical
elements of your vehicle which may
present health risks.
The traction battery does
not require any mainte-
nance. You should not open
it or add any fluid.
Risk of electric shock.
2.17
“HYBRID ASSIST" SYSTEM: introduction (4/5)
Indicator of power
consumption/recovery
The indicator 6 allows you to find the
current consumption or recovery of
electrical energy of the 48 volt traction
battery.
“Energy recovery” zone A
When driving, if you lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal or apply the brake,
the electric motor generates electrical
current during deceleration, and this
energy is used to slow down the vehicle
and recharge the 48 V traction battery.
“Neutral” zone 0
The 48 volt traction battery does not re-
cover and does not consume any elec-
trical energy.
The display of this information de-
pends on the vehicle.
“Assistance” zone B
The 48 volt traction battery supplies the
electrical energy required for the motor
to reduce fuel consumption.
“Full power” zone C
While driving, the full power of the
motor is triggered when you go past the
resistance point as you depress the ac-
celerator.
This zone indicates significant con-
sumption of electrical energy. The
wheel 7 is displayed on the instrument
panel to inform you that maximum
power is being supplied to the motor to
increase the engine torque.
6
A
0
B
C
7
2.18
Operating faults
– If the warning light on the in-
strument panel comes on, this indi-
cates that an operating fault has oc-
curred in the system. The operation
of the vehicle is still maintained;
– Ú and ® lit up on the in-
strument panel accompanied by the
message “Electric failure DANGER”
indicates a system fault.
For approximately 30 seconds,
the
Ú warning light lights up
on the instrument panel accompa-
nied by the message “Electric failure
DANGER”.
Over the following 30 seconds, the
vehicle progressively loses power
from its combustion engine.
Approximately two minutes after the
first time the warning appears, the
vehicle speed is limited to 4.34 mph
(7 km/h) approximately.
In all cases, please consult an
Authorised Dealer.
Warning light ® re-
quires you to stop immedi-
ately, for your own safety,
as soon as traffic conditions
allow. Switch off the engine and do
not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.
“HYBRID ASSIST" SYSTEM: introduction (5/5)
2.19
“HYBRID ASSIST” SYSTEM: important recommendations
Please read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow these instructions may lead to a risk of fire, serious injury
or electric shocks.
In the event of an accident or impact
Never touch the “48 volt” components or orange cables which are exposed and visible inside or outside the vehicle.
Risk of electric shock.
In the event of serious damage to the 48 V traction battery, leaks may occur:
– never touch any liquids (fluids etc.) coming from the 48 V traction battery;
– in the event of contact with the body, wash the affected area with plenty of water and consult a doctor as soon as possible.
In the event of fire
In the event of fire, make everyone evacuate the vehicle immediately and contact the emergency services, informing them that
this is an electric vehicle.
Only use extinguishing agents ABC or BC that are permitted for use with electrical fires. Do not use water or other extinguish-
ing agents.
In the event of damage to the electrical circuit, please call an authorised dealer.
Washing the vehicle
Never wash the engine compartment, the “48 volt” components and the orange cables with a high pressure washer.
This risks damaging the electric circuit.
Never wash the luggage compartment or the rear bench seat with a water jet or high pressure washer.
This risks damaging the electric circuit.
Risk of fire if water leaks into the 48 volt traction battery.
2.20
To apply:
Pull lever 3 upwards. Check that the
vehicle is immobilised. The warning
light
} on the instrument panel will
come on.
Gear lever
Selecting reverse gear
Vehicles with a manual gearbox:
follow the grid pictured on the knob 1
and lift the ring against the gear lever
knob to select reverse.
Vehicles with automatic gear-
box: refer to the information on the
“Automatic gearbox” in Section 2.
The reversing lights will come on as
soon as reverse gear is selected with
the ignition on.
1
GEAR LEVER/HANDBRAKE
Note: depending on the vehicle, if the
dipped beam headlights are on, the
front fog lights come on simultaneously
when reverse gear is selected.
Handbrake
To release
Pull the lever 3 up slightly, press
button 2 and then lower the lever to the
floor.
The warning light
} on the instru-
ment panel will go out.
The red warning light on the instrument
panel will come on if you are driving
with an incorrectly released handbrake.
3
2
When stationary, and de-
pending on the slope and/or
vehicle load, it may be nec-
essary to pull up the hand-
brake at least two extra notches and
engage a gear (1
st
or reverse gear)
for vehicles with a manual gearbox
or position P for vehicles with an au-
tomatic gearbox.
An impact to the under-
side of the vehicle while
manoeuvring (e.g. strik-
ing a post, raised kerb or
other street furniture) may result in
damage to the vehicle (e.g. defor-
mation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have
your vehicle checked by an ap-
proved Dealer.
Make sure that the hand-
brake is properly released
when driving (red indicator
light off), otherwise over-
heating, or even damage, may
occur.
2.21
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (1/3)
Note:
To indicate that the electronic parking
brake is released, a beep sounds and
the message “Apply parking brake” ap-
pears on the instrument panel:
– with the engine running: when the
driver’s door is opened;
– for vehicles not fitted with Stop and
Start, with the engine switched off
(e.g when the engine stalls): when a
front door is opened.
In this case, pull and release switch 3 to
apply the assisted parking brake.
Assisted release of the parking
brake
The brake will be released as soon as
the vehicle starts and accelerates.
Assisted operation
The electronic parking brake immobi-
lises the vehicle when the engine is
switched off by pressing the engine
start/stop button 1 or turning the ig-
nition key (key in 2 “ON” 2 posi-
tion).
In all other circumstances, for example
stalling of the engine or placing of
the engine on standby by the Stop
and Start function (refer to the informa-
tion on the “Stop and Start” function in
Section 2), the electronic parking brake
is not applied automatically. Manual
mode must be used.
For certain country-specific model ver-
sions, the assisted brake application
function is not activated. Refer to the
information on “Manual operation”.
To confirm that the electronic parking
brake is applied, the message “Parking
brake on” and warning light
}
on the instrument panel and warning
light 4 on the switch 3 light up.
After the engine is switched off, indi-
cator light 4 goes out several minutes
after the assisted parking brake has
been applied and indicator light
}
goes out when the vehicle is locked.
Before leaving the vehicle,
check that the electronic
parking brake is fully ap-
plied. Warning light 4 on
switch 3 and warning light
}
on the instrument panel light up to
show that the parking brake is ap-
plied but go out when the doors are
locked.
1
4
3
2
2.22
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (2/3)
Special cases
To park on a slope or while towing a
trailer, for example, pull switch 3 for
a few seconds to gain the maximum
braking.
To park the vehicle without applying the
electronic parking brake (if there is a
risk of freezing, for example):
– with the engine running, while simul-
taneously keeping the brake pedal
and switch 3 depressed, switch off
the engine by pressing the engine
Start/Stop button 1;
– in gear, release the brake pedal and
switch 3.
For vehicles fitted with the Stop and
Start function, with the engine on
standby, the electronic parking brake is
automatically activated if the driver un-
fastens their seat belt or opens the driv-
er's door or gets out of their seat.
Brief stop
To apply the electronic parking brake
manually (when stopping at a red light,
or stopping when the engine is running,
etc.): pull and release the switch 3. The
brake is released as soon as the vehi-
cle is started up again.
Manual operation
You can control the electronic parking
brake manually.
Applying the electronic parking
brake
Pull switch 3. Warning light 4 and warn-
ing light
} on the instrument panel
light up.
Releasing the electronic parking
brake
With the ignition on, depress the brake
pedal then press switch 3: indicator
lights 4 and
} go out.
1
Special feature related to the Stop and Start function: if the driver's seat
is unfastened before the engine goes into standby due to the Stop and
Start function, make sure that the parking brake is applied: the } in-
dicator light on the instrument panel confirms this. Risk of loss of immobilisa-
tion.
4
3
2.23
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (3/3)
Operating faults
– If there is a fault, the © warning
light illuminates on the instrument
panel accompanied by the “Check
parking brake” message and, in
some cases, the
} warning
light.
Please contact an authorised dealer
as soon as possible.
– If there is an assisted parking brake
fault, the warning light
® comes
on, along with the message “Braking
system fault”, a beep and, in some
cases, the warning light
}.
This means that you must stop as
soon as traffic conditions allow.
Versions with an automatic
gearbox
For safety reasons, automatic release
is deactivated when the driver’s door
is open or not shut properly and the
engine is running (in order to prevent
the vehicle from moving without the
driver). The “Release parking brake
manually” message appears on the
instrument panel when the driver de-
presses the accelerator.
It is therefore essential to
immobilise the vehicle by
engaging first gear (manual
gearbox) or position P (au-
tomatic gearbox). If the slope re-
quires it, chock the vehicle.
Never leave your vehicle
without moving the selec-
tor lever to position P and
switching off the engine.
This is because when the vehicle is
stationary with the engine running
and a gear engaged, the vehicle
may begin to move.
There is a risk of accidents.
If no lights or sounds are ap-
parent, this indicates a fault
in the instrument panel. This
indicates that it is essential
to stop immediately (as soon as traf-
fic conditions allow). Ensure that the
vehicle is correctly immobilised and
contact an approved Dealer.
In the event of message
“Electric failure DANGER”
or “Check battery”, manu-
ally activate the electronic
parking brake by pulling switch 2 (or
position the gear lever in P for au-
tomatic gearboxes) before stopping
the engine.
Risk of loss of immobilisation of
the vehicle.
Contact an authorised dealer.
2.24
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO DRIVING (1/6)
Fuel consumption is accredited in ac-
cordance with a standard regulatory
method. Identical for all manufactur-
ers, this enables vehicles to be com-
pared with one another. Consumption
in real time depends on vehicle usage
conditions, the equipment fitted and the
user’s driving style. To optimise fuel
consumption, please refer to the follow-
ing advice.
Depending on the vehicle, you will have
various functions which enable you to
lower your fuel consumption:
– the rev counter with ECO zone;
– gear change indicator;
– the driving style indicator;
– the journey record and eco-driving
advice via the multimedia screen;
– ECO mode.
If fitted on the vehicle, the navigation
system provides additional information.
On the instrument panel A
or B
Depending on the vehicle, the informa-
tion display can be organised and cus-
tomised based on the instrument panel
customisation style selected from the
multimedia screen.
The rev counter with ECO zone 1
Driving in the ECO zone helps you op-
timise fuel consumption under most cir-
cumstances.
1
B
2
A
2.25
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (2/6)
Gear change indicator 2
To obtain optimum consumption levels,
a warning light on the instrument panel
lets you know the best time to move up
or down a gear:
Š or ä move up a gear;
‰ or æ move down a gear.
If you regularly follow this indicator, you
will reduce your vehicle’s fuel consump-
tion.
2
B
2
A
Special feature on vehicles equipped
with the “Hybrid Assist” system
The most suitable gear 3 is displayed
on the instrument panel.
2
3
A
2.26
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (3/6)
5
On the multifunction screen
Journey record
Once the engine is switched off, you
will see “Journey record” displayed on
the screen 5, enabling you to view in-
formation relating to your last journey.
This indicates:
– average fuel consumption;
– number of miles/kilometres travelled;
– number of miles/kilometres saved.
This corresponds to driving without
fuel consumption (deceleration and/
or foot off the accelerator pedal).
An overall rating from 0 to 100 is dis-
played to let you assess your eco driv-
ing performance. The higher the rating,
the lower the fuel consumption.
Eco advice is given to help improve
your performance.
With your favourite journeys saved,
you can compare your performance
between trips and the performance of
other vehicle users.
For more information, please see the
multimedia system instructions.
Driving style indicator 3
Informs you about the driving style
adopted in real time. This is shown by
indicator light 4.
The more petals there are on indica-
tor 4, the smoother and more economi-
cal your driving.
If you regularly monitor this indicator,
you will reduce your vehicle’s fuel con-
sumption.
To activate/deactivate the driving style
indicator, please see the multimedia
system instructions.
4
2.27
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (4/6)
ECO mode
ECO mode is a function which opti-
mises fuel consumption. It acts upon
certain power consuming systems in
the vehicle (heating, air conditioning,
power-assisted steering etc.) and on
certain driving actions (acceleration,
gear changing, cruise control, deceler-
ation etc.).
Limiting acceleration enables low fuel
consumption in urban and surrounding
areas. Reduced usage of the air condi-
tioning reduces fuel consumption with-
out affecting heating comfort.
Activating the function
The function can be activated:
– by pressing switch 5.
– by pressing the switch 6 (please refer
to the information on “Multi-Sense” in
Section 3);
– from the navigation menu on the
multimedia screen (please refer to
the multimedia instructions).
The warning light
comes on on
the instrument panel to confirm activa-
tion.
Disabling the function
Press switch 5.
The warning light goes out on
the instrument panel to confirm deac-
tivation.
While driving, it is possible to leave the
ECO mode temporarily in order to im-
prove engine performance.
For this, depress the accelerator pedal
firmly and fully.
ECO mode is reactivated when you
take pressure off the accelerator pedal.
5
6
2.28
Driving advice and ECO
driving
Behaviour
– Drive carefully for the first few miles
until the engine reaches its normal
operating temperature, rather than
let it warm up while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
– Speed is expensive.
– Dynamic driving with a lot of frequent
acceleration and braking is expen-
sive on fuel in comparison to the time
saved.
– Do not overrev the engine in the in-
termediate gears.
You should always use the highest
gear possible.
– Avoid sudden acceleration.
– Brake as little as possible. If you an-
ticipate an obstacle or bend in ad-
vance, you may then simply release
the accelerator pedal.
– Do not try to maintain the same
speed up a hill, accelerate no more
than you would on flat ground. Keep
your foot in the same position on the
accelerator pedal.
– Double declutching and accelerating
before switching off are unnecessary
in modern vehicles.
Obstructions to the driver
On the driver’s side, only
use mats suitable for the
vehicle, attached with the
pre-fitted components, and check
the fitting regularly. Do not lay one
mat on top of another.
There is a risk of wedging the
pedals.
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (5/6)
– Bad weather, flooded roads:
Do not drive through
floods if the water is
above the lower edge of
the wheel rims.
2.29
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (6/6)
Advice on use
– Favour the ECO mode.
– Electricity is fuel; switch off all the
electrical components which are
not really needed. However (safety
first), keep your lights on when the
visibility is bad (“see and be seen”).
– Use the air vents. Driving with the
windows open at 60 mph (100 km/h)
will increase fuel consumption by
4%.
– Never fill the fuel tank right to the
brim to avoid overflow.
– In vehicles fitted with air condi-
tioning, it is normal to observe an
increase in fuel consumption (espe-
cially in urban conditions) when it is
used. For vehicles fitted with manual
air conditioning, switch off the system
when it is not required.
Recommendations for reducing
consumption and therefore help-
ing to preserve the environment:
If the vehicle has been parked in the
sun, open the doors for a few mo-
ments to let the hot air escape before
starting the engine.
– Do not leave an empty roof rack
fitted to the vehicle.
– It is better to fit a trailer for bulky ob-
jects.
– When towing a caravan, fit a wind
deflector and adjust it carefully.
– Avoid using the car for door-to-door
calls (short journeys with long waits
in between) because the engine
never reaches its normal operating
temperature.
Tyres
– An underinflated tyre increases fuel
consumption.
– Opt for the highest speed pressure
or the pressure recommended to op-
timise fuel consumption indicated
on edge of the driver’s door (please
refer to the information on “Tyre infla-
tion pressure” in Section 4).
– The use of non-recommended tyres
can increase fuel consumption.
2.30
MAINTENANCE AND ANTIPOLLUTION ADVICE
Your vehicle complies with criteria for
recycling and recovering vehicles at the
end of their service life which will come
into force in 2015.
Some parts of your vehicle have there-
fore been designed to facilitate future
recycling.
These parts are easy to remove so
that they can be recovered and reproc-
essed by recycling companies.
By virtue of its design, moderate fuel
consumption and initial settings, your
vehicle also conforms to current anti-
pollution regulations. The manufac-
turer is actively striving to reduce pol-
lutant exhaust gas emissions and to
save energy. But the fuel consumption
of your vehicle and the level of pollutant
exhaust gas emissions are also your
responsibility. Ensure that it is main-
tained and used correctly.
Maintenance
It is important to remember that fail-
ure to respect anti-pollution regulations
could lead to legal action being taken
against the vehicle owner.
In addition, replacing engine, fuel
supply system and exhaust compo-
nents with parts other than those origi-
nally recommended by the manufac-
turer may alter your vehicle so that it
no longer complies with anti-pollution
regulations.
Have your vehicle adjusted and
checked by an authorised dealer, in ac-
cordance with the instructions given in
your maintenance schedule: they will
have all the equipment necessary for
ensuring that your vehicle is maintained
to its original standard.
Engine adjustments
– Spark plugs: for optimum condi-
tions of use, output and performance
the specifications laid down by our
Design Department must be strictly
applied.
If the spark plugs have to be changed,
use the make, type and gap specified
for your vehicle’s engine. Contact an
authorised dealer for this.
– Air filter, fuel filter: a choked ele-
ment will reduce efficiency. It must
be replaced.
– Ignition and idle speed: no adjust-
ment is needed.
Exhaust gas monitoring
system
The exhaust gas monitoring system will
detect any operating faults in the vehi-
cle’s antipollution system.
If this system malfunctions, toxic sub-
stances may be released into the at-
mosphere or damage may occur.
Ä
This warning light on the in-
strument panel will indicate if
there are any faults in the system:
This lights up when the ignition is
switched on and goes out when the
engine is started.
– If it lights up continuously, consult an
approved Dealer as soon as possi-
ble;
– if it flashes, reduce the engine speed
until the light stops flashing. Contact
an authorised dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
2.31
ENVIRONMENT
Emissions
Your vehicle has been designed to emit
fewer greenhouse gases (CO2) while in
use, and therefore to consume less fuel
(eg. 140 g/km, equivalent to 5.3 l/100
km for a diesel vehicle).
Our vehicles are also equipped with a
particle filter system including a cata-
lytic converter, an oxygen sensor and
an active carbon filter (the latter pre-
vents vapour from the fuel tank being
released into the open air).
For certain diesel vehicles, this system
also has a particle filter to reduce the
volume of soot particles emitted.
Please make your own
contribution towards
protecting the environment
too
– Worn parts replaced in the course of
routine vehicle maintenance (vehi-
cle battery, oil filter, air filter, batter-
ies, etc.) and oil containers (empty or
filled with used oil) must be disposed
of through specialist organisations.
– At the end of the vehicle’s service
life, it should be sent to approved
centres to ensure that it is recycled.
– In all cases, comply with local legis-
lation.
Recycling
Your vehicle is 85% recyclable and
95% recoverable.
To achieve these objectives, many of
the vehicle components have been de-
signed to enable them to be recycled.
The materials and structures have
been carefully designed to allow these
components to be easily removed and
reprocessed by specialist companies.
In order to preserve raw material re-
sources, this vehicle incorporates nu-
merous parts made from recycled plas-
tics or renewable materials (vegetable
or animal-derived materials such as
cotton or wool).
Your vehicle has been designed with
respect for the environment in mind for
its entire service life: during production,
use and at the end of its life.
This commitment is illustrated by the
Renault eco² signature.
Manufacture
Your vehicle has been manufactured at
a factory which complies with a policy
to reduce the environmental impact
on the surrounding areas (reduction of
water and energy consumption, visual
and noise pollution, atmospheric emis-
sions and waste water; sorting and re-
using waste).
2.32
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (1/3)
If the vehicle is equipped with the func-
tion, this system monitors the tyre pres-
sure.
Operating principle
Each wheel (except for the emergency
spare wheel) has a sensor in the infla-
tion valve which periodically measures
the tyre pressure.
The system displays the current pres-
sures on the instrument panel 1 and
alerts the driver in the event of insuffi-
cient pressure.
Resetting the standard level
for the tyre pressures
This should be done:
– when the standard tyre pressure
needs to be changed to adapt to
usage conditions (empty, carrying a
load, motorway driving, etc.);
– after swapping a wheel (however
this practice is not recommended);
– after changing a wheel.
It should always be done after checking
the tyre pressure of all four tyres when
cold.
Tyre pressures must correspond to the
current usage of the vehicle (empty,
carrying a load, motorway driving, etc.).
21
Resetting procedure
With the ignition on:
– repeatedly and briefly press the con-
trol 2 to select the tyre pressure dis-
play and, depending on the vehicle,
the “Tyre pressure” function;
– press and hold (around 3 seconds)
the button 2 to launch the reset. The
flashing tyres followed by the mes-
sages “Learning TP initiated” and
then “Tyres location in progress” in-
dicates that the reset request for the
tyre pressure reference value has
been acknowledged.
Reset can take several minutes of driv-
ing.
If the resetting is followed by short
trips, the message “Tyres location in
progress” can remain displayed after
successive restarts.
Note
The standard tyre pressure cannot be
less than that recommended and indi-
cated on the door frame.
3
Resetting can also be done from the
multifunction screen 3 if your vehi-
cle is fitted with a navigation system.
Select the menu “Vehicle”, “Tyre
pressure”.
2.33
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (2/3)
Display
The display 1 and the warning light 4
on the instrument panel warn
you of any tyre pressure faults (flat tyre,
punctured tyre, system fault, etc.).
“Puncture”
A wheel B is shown, depending on the
vehicle, in red or white accompanied
by the warning light 4
fixed, the
message “Puncture” and a beep.
This message appears along with the
® warning light. They indicate that
the affected wheel is punctured or se-
verely underinflated. Replace it or con-
tact an approved dealer if it is punc-
tured. Top up the tyre pressure if the
wheel is deflated.
“Check tyre pressure sensors”
A wheel A disappears, the warning
light 4
flashes for several sec-
onds then comes on continuously and
the message “Check tyre pressure sen-
sors” appears.
This message appears along with the
© warning light. They indicate that
at least one wheel is not fitted with sen-
sors (e.g. emergency spare wheel).
Otherwise, consult an authorised
dealer.
“Adjust tyre pressure”
A wheel B is shown, depending on the
vehicle, in orange or white accompa-
nied by the warning light 4
fixed
and the message “Adjust tyre pres-
sure”. They indicate that a wheel is de-
flated.
Check and, if necessary, readjust the
pressures of the four wheels when cold.
The warning light 4
goes off after
a few minutes’ driving.
A
B
1
For your safety, the warning
light
® requires you
to stop immediately as soon
as traffic conditions allow.
The sudden loss of pressure in a tyre (burst tyre, etc.) cannot be detected by the
system.
4
2.34
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (3/3)
Tyre repair product and
inflation kit
Because the valves are specially de-
signed, only use equipment approved
by the approved network. Please refer
to “Tyre inflation kit” in Section 5.
Replacing wheels/tyres
This system requires specific equip-
ment (wheels, tyres, hubcaps, etc.).
Please see the information on “Tyres”
in Section 5.
Contact an approved Dealer to fit new
tyres and to find out about available ac-
cessories compatible with the system
and available from your dealer net-
work: the use of any other accessory
could affect the correct operation of the
system or damage a sensor.
Emergency spare wheel
If the vehicle is equipped with an emer-
gency spare wheel, it will not have a
sensor.
Changing a wheel
The system may take sev-
eral minutes depending on
use for the new wheel po-
sitions and pressures to be recog-
nised; check the tyre pressures after
all operations.
“Tyres location in progress”
This message “Tyres location in
progress” appears when driving if one
or more wheels have been fitted with
sensors not recognised by Renault.
Consult an approved dealer
Readjustment of tyre
pressures
The tyre pressures should be ad-
justed when cold (please refer to the
label located on the edge of the driver’s
door). If the tyre pressures cannot be
checked when the tyres are cold, the
recommended pressures should be in-
creased by 0.2 to 0.3 bar (3 PSI).
Never deflate a hot tyre.
This function is an addi-
tional driving aid.
However, the function is
not intended to replace the
driver. It cannot, therefore, under
any circumstances replace the vig-
ilance or the responsibility of the
driver. Check the tyre pressures, in-
cluding the emergency spare wheel,
once a month.
2.35
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (1/5)
ABS (anti-lock braking
system)
Under heavy braking, the ABS prevents
the wheels from locking, allowing the
stopping distance to be managed and
keeping control of the vehicle.
Under these circumstances, the vehi-
cle can be steered to avoid an obstacle
whilst braking. In addition, this system
can increase stopping distances, par-
ticularly on roads with low surface grip
(wet ground etc.).
You will feel a pulsation through the
brake pedal each time the system is
activated. The ABS does not in any way
improve the vehicle's physical perform-
ance relating to the road surface and
roadholding. It is still essential to follow
the rules of good driving practice (such
as driving at a safe distance from the
vehicle in front etc.).
– ABS (anti-lock braking system) ;
– ESC (electronic stability control)
with understeer control and trac-
tion control;
– emergency brake assist;
– hill start assistance.
Other driving assistance systems are
detailed on the following pages.
In an emergency, apply firm and
continuous pressure to the brake
pedal. There is no need to pump
it repeatedly. The ABS will modu-
late the force applied in the braking
system.
These functions are an ad-
ditional aid in the event of
critical driving conditions,
enabling the vehicle behav-
iour to be adapted to suit the driving
conditions.
The functions do not take the place
of the driver. They do not increase
the vehicle’s limits and should
not encourage you to drive more
quickly. Therefore, they can under
no circumstances replace the vigi-
lance or responsibility of the driver
when manoeuvring the vehicle (the
driver must always be ready for
sudden incidents which may occur
when driving).
2.36
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (2/5)
Operating faults:
–
© and x lit up on the in-
strument panel accompanied by the
messages “Check ABS”, “Check
braking system” and “Check ESC”:
this indicates that the ABS, the ESC
and the emergency brake assist are
disabled. Braking is always ena-
bled;
–
x, D, © and ® lit
up on the instrument panel alongside
the message “Braking system fault”:
this indicates a fault in the braking
system.
In both cases, consult an approved
dealer.
Your braking systems
are partially operational.
However, it is dangerous
to brake suddenly and
it is essential to stop immediately,
as soon as traffic conditions allow.
Contact an approved dealer.
Warning light ® re-
quires you to stop immedi-
ately, for your own safety,
as soon as traffic conditions
allow. Switch off the engine and do
not restart it. Contact an approved
Dealer.
2.37
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (3/5)
Electronic stability control
ESC with understeer control
and traction control
Electronic stability control ESC
This system helps you to keep control
of the vehicle in critical driving condi-
tions (avoiding an obstacle, loss of grip
on a bend, etc.).
Operating principle
A sensor in the steering wheel detects
the direction selected by the driver.
Other sensors throughout the vehicle
measure the actual direction.
The system compares the direction se-
lected by the driver and the actual di-
rection of the vehicle and corrects this
as necessary by applying the brakes
selectively and/or acting on the engine
power. If the system is triggered, the
indicator light flashes on the in-
strument panel.
Understeer control
This system optimises the action of the
ESC in the case of pronounced under-
steer (loss of front axle road holding).
Traction control
This system helps to limit wheelspin of
the drive wheels and to control the ve-
hicle when pulling away accelerating or
decelerating.
Operating principle
Using the wheel sensors, the system
measures and compares the speed of
the drive wheels at all times and slows
down their over-rotation. If a wheel is
starting to slip, the system brakes au-
tomatically until the drive supplied be-
comes compatible with the level of grip
under the wheel again.
The system also adjusts the engine
speed to the grip available under the
wheels, independently of the pressure
exerted on the accelerator pedal.
Operating faults
When the system detects an operat-
ing fault the message “Check ESC” and
warning light
© and appear
on the instrument panel.
In this case, the ESC and traction con-
trol system are deactivated. Consult an
authorised dealer.
2.38
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (4/5)
Emergency brake assist
This system supplements the ABS
and helps reduce vehicle stopping dis-
tances.
Operating principle
The system is for detecting an emer-
gency braking situation. In this case,
the braking assistance immediately de-
velops maximum power and may trig-
ger ABS regulation.
ABS braking is maintained as long as
the brake pedal is applied.
Hazard warning lights switching on
Depending on the vehicle, these may
light up in the event of sudden decel-
eration.
Braking anticipation
Depending on the vehicle, when you
rapidly release the accelerator, the
system anticipates the braking ma-
noeuvre in order to reduce stopping
distances.
Special cases
When using the cruise control:
– if you use the accelerator, when you
release it, the system may be trig-
gered;
– if you do not use the accelerator, the
system will not be triggered.
Operating faults
When the system detects an operat-
ing fault the message “Check brak-
ing system” appears on the instrument
panel along with the
© warning
light.
Consult an approved dealer.
2.39
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (5/5)
Hill start assistance
Depending on the gradient of the in-
cline, this system assists the driver
when starting on a hill. It prevents the
vehicle from rolling backwards by au-
tomatically applying the brakes when
the driver lifts his/her foot off the brake
pedal to depress the accelerator pedal.
System operation
It only operates when the gear lever is
in a position other than neutral (other
than N or P for automatic transmis-
sions) and the vehicle is completely
stationary (brake pedal depressed)
The system holds the vehicle for ap-
proximately 2 seconds. The brakes are
then released (the vehicle will move ac-
cording to the slope).
The hill start assistance
system cannot completely
prevent the vehicle from
rolling backwards in all sit-
uations (extremely steep gradients,
etc.).
In all cases, the driver may depress
the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling backwards.
The hill start assistance function
should not be used for prolonged
stops: use the brake pedal.
This function is not designed to im-
mobilise the vehicle permanently.
If necessary, use the brake pedal to
stop the vehicle.
The driver must remain particularly
vigilant when driving on slippery or
low-grip surfaces and/or on hills.
Risk of serious injury.
2.40
ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (1/7)
Using information from the radar-cam-
era 1, the system calculates the dis-
tance which separates it from the
vehicle in front and the surrounding pe-
destrians.
It notifies the driver if there is a risk of
head-on collision. The driver can then
brake the vehicle to limit the damage
arising from a collision.
Note: make sure the windscreen is not
obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensa-
tion etc.).
1
This function is an addi-
tional driving aid. This func-
tion is not under any circum-
stances intended to replace
the due care and attention of the
driver, who should at all times be
in control of the vehicle.
This system can apply maximum
braking to the vehicle until it is
completely stationary if necessary.
For safety reasons, always wear
your seat belt when travelling in
your vehicle and make sure that it
is loaded so that no items can be
thrown forward and hit the occu-
pants.
2.41
Special features
When the vehicle speed:
– is less than 27.9 mph (45 km/h) ap-
proximately, the warning and brak-
ing are activated at the same time;
– is between about 27.9 mph
(45 km/h) and 48 mph (80 km/h)
approximately, the warning is acti-
vated. Braking will only be triggered if
the vehicle preceding you is moving.
Braking is not activated for stationary
vehicles;
– is between about 48 mph (80 km/h)
and 99.2 mph (160 km/h), the warn-
ing and braking are only triggered if
the vehicle preceding you is moving.
The warning and braking are not ac-
tivated for stationary vehicles;
– is above 99.2 mph (160 km/h), the
system is not active.
ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (2/7)
Detection of vehicles
Operation
When driving (speed between about
4.34 and 99.2 mph (7 and 160 km/h)), if
there is a risk of collision with the vehi-
cle in front, the system:
– warns you of a collision risk:
– the warning light
is dis-
played in red on the instrument
panel, accompanied by a beep;
or
– the indicator 2 is displayed in red
on the instrument panel and, de-
pending on the vehicle, on the head
up display, accompanied by a beep.
If the driver depresses the brake
pedal and the system still detects a
risk of collision, the brake force is in-
creased.
– triggers braking:
if the driver fails to react following
the alert and collision becomes im-
minent.
2
You can interrupt braking at any
point by:
– tapping the accelerator pedal;
or
– turning the steering wheel in an
avoidance manoeuvre.
2.42
Detection of pedestrians
Operation
When driving (speed between about
4.2 mph (7 km/h) and 36 mph (60 km/h),
when there is a risk of impact with a pe-
destrian:
– the warning light
is displayed
in red on the instrument panel, ac-
companied by a beep;
or
– the indicator 3 is displayed in red on
the instrument panel and, depending
on the vehicle, on the head up dis-
play, accompanied by a beep.
3
ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (3/7)
When the impact is imminent, the
system activates the braking.
The system can apply maximum brak-
ing to the vehicle until it is completely
stationary if necessary.
2.43
ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (4/7)
Activating or deactivating the
system
For vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
On the multifunction screen 4, select
the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving assist-
ance”, and “Active braking”, and then
choose “ON” or “OFF”.
Press the switch 6 OK again to activate
or deactivate the function:
= function activated
< function deactivated
The warning light
is displayed on
the instrument panel when the system
is deactivated.
4
7
6
For vehicle not fitted with a
navigation system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 6 OK to access
the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control 7 up or
down until you reach the “Driving as-
sistance” menu. Press the switch 6
OK;
– repeatedly press control 7 up or down
until you reach the “Active braking”
menu, then press the switch 6 OK.
You can access menu “Driving as-
sistance” directly from button 5
.
5
This system is reactivated each time
the ignition is switched on.
2.44
ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (5/7)
Conditions for non-activation
of the system
The system cannot be activated:
– when the gear lever is in neutral;
– when the parking brake is activated;
– while cornering.
As a general rule, if the driver shows
signs of attention (action on the steering
wheel, pedals etc.), the system delays
its operation or does not activate.
Operating faults
When the system detects an operating
fault, the
warning light lights up
on the instrument panel, with the mes-
sage “Active braking disconnected”.
Consult an approved dealer
Temporarily not available
When the system detects a tempo-
rary unavailability, the
warning
light lights up on the instrument panel
accompanied by the message “Active
braking: sensor blind” or, depending on
the vehicle, “Radar-camera: no visibil-
ity”.
The possible causes are:
– the system is temporarily blinded
(glare from the sun, dipped beam
headlights, bad weather conditions
etc.). The system will be operational
again when visibility conditions are
better.
– The system is temporarily disrupted
(for example: windscreen obscured
by dirt, ice, snow etc.). In this case,
park the vehicle and switch off the
engine. Clean the windscreen. When
you next start the engine, the warn-
ing light and the message go out.
– If this is not the case, this may arise
from another cause; contact an
Approved Dealer.
2.45
ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (6/7)
Active emergency braking
This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care
and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle. The triggering of this function may be
delayed or prevented when the system detects clear signs of control of the vehicle by the driver (action on the steer-
ing wheel, pedals etc.).
System servicing/repairs
– In the event of an impact, the radar-camera alignment may be changed, and its operation may consequently be affected.
Deactivate the function, then consult an authorised dealer.
– Any work in the area where the radar-camera is located (repairs, replacements, windscreen modifications etc.) must be car-
ried out by a qualified professional.
Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.
In the event of system disturbance
Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:
– a complex environment (metal bridge, tunnel etc.);
– poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice etc.);
– poor visibility (night, fog etc.);
– poor contrast between the object (vehicle, pedestrian etc.) and the surrounding area (e.g. pedestrian dressed in white lo-
cated in a snowy area etc.);
– being dazzled (glaring sun, lights of vehicles travelling in the opposite direction etc.);
– windscreen obscured (by dirt, ice, snow, condensation etc.).
Risk of inadvertent braking.
2.46
ACTIVE EMERGENCY BRAKING (7/7)
Limitation of the system operation
– A vehicle travelling in the opposite direction will not trigger any alert or any action on the system operation.
– The radar-camera area on the windscreen should be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the
proper operation of the system.
– The system cannot respond to small vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles as effectively as to other vehicles.
– The system may not operate properly when the road surface is slippery (rain, snow, black ice etc.).
– To ensure correct operation, the system needs to distinguish the complete outline of the pedestrian. So the system cannot
detect:
– pedestrians in the darkness or in poor lighting conditions;
– partially visible pedestrians:
– pedestrians less than approximately 80 cm tall;
– pedestrians carrying large objects;
– ...
Deactivating the function
You must disable the function if:
– the brake lights are not functioning;
– the area of the radar-camera has been damaged (on the windscreen side or the interior rear-view mirror side);
– the vehicle is being towed (breakdowns);
– the windscreen is cracked or distorted (do not carry out repairs on this area of the windscreen; have it changed by an
Authorised Dealer).
Halting the function
You can halt the active braking function at any time by tapping the accelerator pedal or by turning the steering wheel in a avoid-
ance manoeuvre.
In the event of the system behaving abnormally, deactivate it and consult an authorised dealer.
2.47
Activation/deactivation
Vehicles not fitted with the “Lane
keeping assist” function
From the multifunction screen 2: select
“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Lane
departure warning”, then choose “ON”
or “OFF”.
Vehicles fitted with the “Lane
keeping assist” function
From the multifunction screen 2: select
“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Lane
Keeping” then
to activate or
“OFF” to deactivate the “Lane Keeping
Assist” function.
You can additionally activate the lane
keeping assist function (refer to the in-
formation on “Lane Keeping Assist” in
Section 2).
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (1/4)
Using information from the camera 1,
the function warns the driver if he
crosses a continuous or broken line
without activating the direction indica-
tor lights.
Note: make sure the windscreen is not
obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensa-
tion etc.).
On equipped vehicles, some infor-
mation is given on the head-up dis-
play.
1
This function is an addi-
tional driving aid. This func-
tion is not under any cir-
cumstances intended to
replace the due care and attention
of the driver, who should at all times
be in control of the vehicle.
The lane departure warning func-
tion does not correct the vehi-
cle’s trajectory.
3
2
You can access menu “Driving as-
sistance” directly from button 3
.
2.48
The function is set to notify the
driver if:
– speed is between about 43.4 mph
(70 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h);
and
– the line indicators 4 are coloured
green or, depending on the vehicle,
the
warning light is white.
The function triggers an alert if a line
is crossed without the direction indica-
tor being activated.
The function alerts the driver:
– by using a beep or, depending on
the vehicle, a vibration of the steer-
ing wheel;
– and the indicator of the line crossed
turns red or, depending on the vehi-
cle, the 5
warning light is dis-
played on the instrument panel.
Note: on bends, the function allows for
slightly cutting the bend.
Operation
When the function is activated, the in-
dicators 4 for the left and right lines, or
depending on the vehicle, the
warning light, are displayed in grey on
the instrument panel.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (2/4)
Conditions in which the
function is not available
– Indicators activated or having been
activated approximately four sec-
onds prior to departing from the lane;
– very fast lane departure;
– driving continuously near a line;
– 4 seconds approximately after
changing lanes;
– tight bends;
– impaired visibility;
– ...
If the function is unavailable, the line in-
dicators 4 or, depending on the vehicle,
the
warning light are displayed
in grey on the instrument panel.
4
5
2.49
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (3/4)
2
– “Sensitivity”: adjust the sensitivity
level for line detection. To do this,
select:
– “Low”: line detected when cross-
ing;
– “Average”: line detected on ap-
proach;
– “high”: line detected nearby.
Vehicles fitted with the “Lane keep-
ing assist” function:
From the multifunction screen 2,
select “Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”,
“SETTINGS”.
– “VOLUME”: adjust the volume of the
warning;
– “Intensity”: adjust the level of steer-
ing wheel vibration;
– “Sensitivity”: adjust the sensitivity
level for line detection. To do this,
select:
– “Low”: line detected when cross-
ing;
– “Average”: line detected on ap-
proach;
– “high”: line detected nearby.
Adjustment
Vehicles not fitted with the “Lane
keeping assist” function
From the multifunction screen 2, select
“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Lane
departure warning setting”.
– “VOLUME”: adjust the volume of the
warning;
– “Intensity”: adjust the level of steer-
ing wheel vibration;
Operating faults
In the event of a malfunction, the left
and right line indicators or, depending
on the vehicle, the warning light
disappear or stay grey on the instru-
ment panel. In some cases, they are
accompanied by the message “Lane
departure warning check” or the
©
warning light on the instrument panel.
Consult an approved dealer.
2.50
This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care
and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
System servicing/repairs
– In the event of an impact, the camera alignment may be changed, and its operation may consequently be affected. Deactivate
the function, then consult an authorised dealer.
– Any work in the area where the camera is located (repairs, replacements, windscreen modifications etc.) must be carried
out by a qualified professional.
Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.
In the event of system disturbance
Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:
– a complex environment (tunnel etc.);
– poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice etc.);
– poor visibility (night, fog etc.);
– road markings which are worn, lacking in contrast or very widely spaced from one another (lines partially erased etc);
– being dazzled (glaring sun, lights of vehicles travelling in the opposite direction etc.);
– the road is narrow, winding or undulating (tight bends etc.);
– closely following a vehicle travelling in the same lane.
Risk of false alarms or absence of warnings
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (4/4)
2.51
LANE KEEPING ASSIST (1/4)
Using information from the camera 1,
the function is triggered if a contin-
uous or broken line is crossed without
activating the direction indicator lights,
with corrective action on the steering
system of the vehicle.
A notification on the instrument panel
appears to warn you of this.
On equipped vehicles, some infor-
mation is given on the head-up dis-
play.
1
Note: make sure the windscreen is not
obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensa-
tion etc.).
This function is an addi-
tional driving aid. This func-
tion is not under any circum-
stances intended to replace
the due care and attention of the
driver, who should at all times be
in control of the vehicle.
2.52
LANE KEEPING ASSIST (2/4)
Activation/deactivation
From the multifunction screen 1: select
“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Lane
Keeping” then to activate or
“OFF" to deactivate it.
1
You can access menu “Driving as-
sistance” directly from button 2
.
2
3
Operation
When the function is activated, the cor-
rection indicators 3 for the left and right
lines are displayed in grey on the instru-
ment panel.
The function is set to react if:
– speed is between about 43.4 mph
(70 km/h) and 99.2 mph (160 km/h);
and
– the correction indicators 3 are green.
The function reacts if the vehicle ap-
proaches or crosses a line without ac-
tivation of the indicator lights. In these
cases:
– the function triggers corrective action
on the vehicle’s steering system and
trajectory;
– the indicator 3 on the same side as
the crossed side line turns orange on
the instrument panel.
Note: on bends, the function allows for
slightly cutting the bend.
The function is deactivated by de-
fault every time the engine is started.
You can retake control of the ve-
hicle at any time by operating the
steering wheel.
When Lane Keeping Assist is activated,
the “Lane Departure Warning” function
is automatically activated (please refer
to the information on “Lane Departure
Warning” in Section 2).
2.53
– only one line is detected;
– very fast lane departure;
– driving continuously near a line;
– impaired visibility;
– 4 seconds approximately after
changing lanes;
– during tight bends;
– the lane width is too narrow;
– ...
When the function is unavailable, the
correction indicators are displayed in
grey on the instrument panel.
LANE KEEPING ASSIST (3/4)
Adjustment
From the multifunction screen 1,
select “Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”,
“SETTINGS”:
“Sensitivity”: adjust the sensitivity
level for line detection. To do this,
select:
– “Low”: line detected when cross-
ing;
– “Average”: line detected on ap-
proach;
– “high”: line detected nearby.
Operating faults
In the event of a malfunction, the left-
hand and right-hand correction indica-
tors disappear or remain grey on the in-
strument panel.
In some cases, they are accompanied
by the message “Check Lane Keeping”
or the
© warning light on the in-
strument panel.
Consult an approved dealer.
1
Special case
When the function is set to react or it
reacts and cannot detect any further
action from the driver on the steering
wheel:
– the message “Keep control” appears
on the instrument panel;
– the right-hand and left-hand correc-
tion indicators turn orange;
– a beep sounds.
If the driver does not take action, the
system may switch off the warnings
above and make the function unavail-
able until the next action of the driver on
the steering wheel.
Conditions in which the
function is not available
– Correction indicators activated or
having been activated approximately
four seconds prior to crossing the
line;
– the driver’s hands are not on the
steering wheel;
2.54
This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care
and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
System servicing/repairs
– In the event of an impact, the camera alignment may be changed, and its operation may consequently be affected. Deactivate
the function and consult an authorised dealer.
– Any work in the area where the camera is located (repairs, replacements, windscreen modifications etc.) must be carried
out by a qualified professional.
Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.
In the event of system disturbance
Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:
– a complex environment (tunnel etc.) ;
– poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice etc.);
– poor visibility (night, fog etc.) ;
– road markings which are worn, lacking in contrast or very widely spaced from one another (lines partially erased etc) ;
– being dazzled (glaring sun, lights of vehicles travelling in the opposite direction etc.) ;
– the road is narrow, winding or undulating (tight bends etc.);
– closely following a vehicle travelling in the same lane.
In this case, the “Lane Keeping Assist” may react incorrectly or not at all.
Risk of unwanted, incorrect correction or no correction of trajectory.
Deactivating the function
You must disable the function if:
– the area of the camera has been damaged (on the windscreen side or the interior rear-view mirror side);
– the road is slippery (snow, black ice, aquaplaning, gravel etc.) ;
– poor visibility (night, fog etc.);
– the windscreen is cracked or distorted (do not carry out windscreen repairs in this area; have it changed by an Authorised
Dealer);
– the vehicle is towing a trailer or a caravan;
– the vehicle is entering an area with several surface markings (an area with road works etc.).
LANE KEEPING ASSIST (4/4)
2.55
BLIND SPOT WARNING (1/4)
This system alerts the driver to other
vehicles in the detection zone A.
The system is activated when the ve-
hicle’s speed is between approxi-
mately 30 km/h (19 mph) and 140 km/h
(87 mph).
This function uses sensors 1 installed in
the front and rear bumper of both sides.
1
A
Special feature
Make sure that the sensors are not ob-
scured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
If a sensor is obscured, the message
“Blind spotclean sensor” will appear on
the instrument panel. Clean the sen-
sors.
A
This function is an addi-
tional aid which indicates
other vehicles in the blind
spot area.
It can never in any case be a sub-
stitute for care nor for the driver’s
responsibility while in charge of his
vehicle.
The driver should always be ready
for sudden incidents while driv-
ing: always ensure that there are
no small, narrow moving obstacles
(such as a child, animal, pushchair,
bicycle, stone, post etc.) in the blind
spot when manoeuvring.
2.56
Activation/deactivation
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
On the multifunction screen 2, select
the “vehicle” menu, “Driving assist-
ance”, and “Blind spot alert”, and then
choose “ON” or “OFF”.
You can access menu “Driving as-
sistance” directly from button 3
.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 4 OK to access
the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control 5 up or
down until you reach the “Driving as-
sistance” menu. Press the switch 4
OK;
BLIND SPOT WARNING (2/4)
– repeatedly press the control 5 up or
down until you reach the Blind spot
alert menu, then press the switch 4
OK .
– press the 4 OK switch again to acti-
vate or deactivate the function.
4
5
When the engine is started, the system
remembers its position when the igni-
tion was last switched off.
3
2
2.57
1
BLIND SPOT WARNING (3/4)
Operation
This function gives a warning:
– when the vehicle speed is between
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and
87 mph (140 km/h);
– when another vehicle is in the blind
spot area and travelling in the same
direction as your vehicle.
If your vehicle is overtaking another ve-
hicle, the indicator 6 will be activated
only if that vehicle remains in the blind
spot for more than one second.
Indicator 6
An indicator light 6 is located on each
door mirror 7.
Note: clean the door mirrors 7 regularly
so that the indicators 6 can be seen.
Display B
The function is activated and has not
detected any vehicles.
Display C
First warning: the indicator 6 means
that a vehicle has been detected in the
blind spot.
Display D
When the direction indicator is acti-
vated, the indicator light 6 flashes when
a vehicle is detected in the blind spot on
the side towards which you are about to
steer. If you cancel the direction indica-
tor, the function will return to the initial
warning (display C).
7
6
B
C
D
The system’s detection range oper-
ates according to a standard lane
width. If you are driving in narrow
traffic lanes, it may detect vehicles
in other lanes.
6
2.58
Operating faults
If the system detects a fault, the mes-
sage “Check blind spot alert” is dis-
played on the instrument panel. Consult
an approved dealer.
Note: when the engine is started, the
indicator light 6, display B, flashes
three times. It is normal.
– The system’s detection
range operates according
to a standard lane width. If
you are driving in wide traf-
fic lanes, the system might not
be able to detect a vehicle in the
blind spot.
– The system might be disrupted
momentarily if it is exposed to
strong electromagnetic waves
(as beneath high-tension power
lines) or to very poor weather
conditions (heavy rain, snow
etc.). Remain aware of driving
conditions.
There is a risk of accidents.
BLIND SPOT WARNING (4/4)
Because sensors have
been installed in the bump-
ers, any work (repairs, re-
placements, touching up of
paintwork) must be carried out by a
qualified professional.
6
B
C
D
Conditions for non-function
– If the object is not moving;
– if traffic is heavy;
– the road is winding;
– if front and rear sensors both detect
an object at the same time (e.g.
when passing an articulated lorry).
– ...
2.59
SAFE DISTANCE ALERT (1/3)
Activating/deactivating the
function
From the multifunction screen 2, select
menu “Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”,
“Distance warning” then choose “ON”
or “OFF”.
Using the information from the radar-
camera 1, this function informs the
driver of the time interval between him
and the vehicle in front so that a safe
stopping distance between the two ve-
hicles can be maintained.
Note: make sure the windscreen is not
obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensa-
tion etc.).
The function is activated when the ve-
hicle speed is between about 18.6 and
124 mph (30 and 200 km/h).
When the engine is started, the func-
tion maintains the same status that was
active when the engine was last stop-
ped.
You can access menu “Driving as-
sistance” directly from button 3
.
2
3
This function is an addi-
tional driving aid. This func-
tion is not under any cir-
cumstances intended to
replace the due care and attention
of the driver, who should at all times
be in control of the vehicle.
1
2.60
SAFE DISTANCE ALERT (2/3)
The measurement is dis-
played for information only:
the system performs no
action on the vehicle.
This function is not designed for use
in urban conditions or for a dynamic
driving style (sudden cornering, ac-
celeration, braking, etc.), but rather
for stable driving conditions.
The function does not interact with
the braking system.
The windscreen must remain clean
to ensure the correct operation of
the system.
– C (orange): the time interval falls
between around 1 and 2 seconds (in-
sufficient distance between the two
vehicles);
– D (red): the time interval is less than
or equal to around one second (very
insufficient distance between the two
vehicles).
If the interval between the two vehicles
is less than around 0.5 seconds, noti-
fication 4, display D, will flash on the
instrument panel. Under certain condi-
tions, the time interval may not be dis-
played:
– while cornering;
– when changing lane;
– if the vehicle in front is sufficiently far
or outside the range of the sensor.
This function is essential if adaptive
cruise control is activated.
On equipped vehicles, some infor-
mation is given on the head-up dis-
play.
4
A
B
C
D
Operation
Upon activating the function, indicator 4
notifies the driver of the distance sepa-
rating them from the vehicle in front.
– A (grey): function not operational;
– A (green): no vehicle detected;
– B (green): the time interval is greater
than or equal to around two seconds
(distance between the two vehicles
adapted to your speed);
2.61
This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care
and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
System servicing/repairs
– In the event of an impact, the radar-camera alignment may be changed, and its operation may consequently be affected.
Deactivate the function and consult an authorised dealer.
– Any work in the area where the radar-camera is located (repairs, replacements, windscreen modifications etc.) must be car-
ried out by a qualified professional.
Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.
In the event of system disturbance
Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:
– a complex environment (tunnel etc.);
– poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice etc.);
– poor visibility (night, fog etc.);
– poor contrast between the vehicle preceding it and the surrounding area (e.g. white vehicle in a snowy area etc.);
– being dazzled (glaring sun, lights of vehicles travelling in the opposite direction etc.);
– the road is narrow, winding and undulating (tight bends etc.)
Risk of erroneous false alarms.
SAFE DISTANCE ALERT (3/3)
2.62
FATIGUE DETECTION WARNING (1/2)
This function analyses the behaviour
of the driver at the steering wheel and
warns him of the risk of fatigue.
This function is an addi-
tional driving aid in case of
risk of fatigue. The function
does not take the place of
the driver.
Under no circumstances should this
function replace the driver’s care or
responsibility whilst driving.
Activation/deactivation
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
From the multifunction screen 1: select
“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Fatigue
detection warn.”, then choose “ON” or
“OFF”.
You can access menu “Driving as-
sistance” directly from button 2
.
2
1
When the engine is started, the
system remembers its position
when the ignition was last switched
off.
2.63
– repeatedly press the control 5 up or
down until you reach the Fatigue de-
tection warn. menu, then press the
switch 4 OK.
– press the 4 OK switch again to acti-
vate or deactivate the function.
Operation
The function is set to notify the
driver if:
– the vehicle speed is greater than ap-
proximately 37.2 mph (60 km/h);
and
– Approximately 15 minutes have
passed since the deletion of the pre-
vious warning.
The function triggers an alert if the
system detects repeated signs of fa-
tigue in the driver at the steering wheel.
When a risk of fatigue is detected,
the message “Fatigue warning have a
break” is displayed on the instrument
panel accompanied by a beep.
Press switch 4 OK to delete the warn-
ing.
It is advisable to stop as soon as pos-
sible for a break.
FATIGUE DETECTION WARNING (2/2)
Note:
– if the warning is not deleted by press-
ing switch 4 OK, the beep repeats;
– some driving styles may be inter-
preted by the system as a sign of
tiredness (action on the steering
wheel, frequency of activation of the
direction indicators etc.) ;
– the use of the function is also useful
on monotonous roads (motorways,
high-speed roads etc).
Operating faults
If the system detects a fault, the mes-
sage “Check fatigue warning” is dis-
played on the instrument panel. Consult
an approved dealer
4
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 4 OK to access
the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control 5 up or
down until you reach the “Driving as-
sistance” menu. Press the switch 4
OK;
5
2.64
OVERSPEED ALERT (1/3)
The overspeed alert with signage panel
recognition notifies the driver that they
are exceeding the speed limit for the
section of road on which they are cur-
rently travelling.
For vehicles equipped with a navigation
system and if the vehicle is travelling in
a country where the speed units differ
from those of the vehicle, the system
displays the speed limit sign in the unit
of the country, alongside the speed limit
converted to the unit used by the vehi-
cle’s instrument panel.
For countries where the speed limit is
reduced during rainy weather on some
types of roads, on vehicles equipped
with a navigation system, the system
can modify the limited speed after a few
seconds of wiping the windscreen.
Special situations
The system does not take into account
exceptional speed limit measures, such
as peak pollution days.
On equipped vehicles, some infor-
mation is given on the head-up dis-
play.
Operating principle
The system detects speed limit signs
on the side of the road and displays the
speed limit.
It mainly uses information taken from
the camera 1, attached to the wind-
screen behind the rear-view mirror.
Note: make sure the windscreen is not
obscured (dirt, mud, snow, condensa-
tion etc.).
For vehicles which are equipped with it,
the system also uses information from
the navigation system.
Once the speed limiter is activated, you
can adjust the speed limiter indication
displayed by the system.
In the event of exceeding the speed
limit, the sign display is modified (the
characters change to red or the circle
around the sign flashes) no notify you.
1
2.65
OVERSPEED ALERT (2/3)
Activating/deactivating the
system
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
On the multifunction screen 2, select
the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving assist-
ance”, and “Speed alert settings”, and
then choose “ON” or “OFF”.
With the function activated and de-
pending on local laws, you can activate
the “increased vigilance zones”. The
system will notify you of the distance
separating you from this zone, and
while you are travelling in the zone.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 5 OK to access
the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Driving as-
sistance” menu. Press the switch 5
OK;
– repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the Speed alert
menu, then press the switch 5 OK.
– press OK to turn the function on or
off.
Varying the limit speed
If the speed limiter notification differs
from the detected speed value, press
and hold the switch 4:
– side a (+) to increase the notification
speed to the detected speed;
– side b (-) to reduce the notification
speed to the detected speed.
You can access menu “Driving as-
sistance” directly from button 3
.
4
a
b
5
6
3
2
2.66
OVERSPEED ALERT (3/3)
This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any
circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention of the
driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, re-
gardless of the system indications.
The system enables maximum speed signs to be detected and does not detect
other signs.
The driver should not, however, ignore signs which are not detected by the system
and should as a priority comply with the traffic signage and the highway code.
In the event of poor visibility (fog, snow, frost, etc.), it is possible that the system
may not indicate the correct speed to the driver.
The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of
the system indications.
Operating fault
The system cannot detect the speed
limit if:
– the windscreen is not clean;
– the camera is blinded by the sun;
– there is insufficient visibility (night,
fog, etc.);
– the signs are not legible (snow, etc.)
or are hidden (by another vehicle or
by trees);
– the information taken from the navi-
gation system is not up to date.
2.67
SPEED LIMITER (1/3)
Switching on
Press switch 1 on side . The indica-
tor light
comes on, lit orange, and
the message “Speed limiter” appears
on the instrument panel, accompanied
by dashes to indicate that the speed
limiter function is activated and waiting
to store a limited speed.
To store the current speed, press
switch 2 side a (+): the limited speed
replaces the dashes.
The minimum stored speed is 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Controls
1 Main “On/Off” switch.
2 Controls for:
a speed limiter activation, memory
and increase (+);
b decreasing the speed limiter (-).
3 Activation and recall of memorised
limited speed (R).
4 Speed limiter function standby (with
limited speed memory) (O).
The speed limiter function helps you
stay within the driving speed limit that
you choose, known as the limit speed.
If you wish, you can associate the
speed limiter and the “Overspeed
alert” function (please refer to the in-
formation on the “Overspeed alert”
in Section 2).
1
2
a
3
4
b
2.68
SPEED LIMITER (2/3)
Exceeding the limit speed
It is possible to exceed the limit speed
at any time. To do this: press the accel-
erator pedal firmly and fully (beyond
the resistance point).
While the speed is being exceeded, the
speed limiter flashes red on the instru-
ment panel.
Then, release the accelerator: the
speed limiter function will return as
soon as you reach a speed lower than
the stored speed.
Limited speed cannot be maintained
If driving up or down a steep gradient,
the system is unable to maintain the
limited speed: the stored speed flashes
red on the instrument panel and a beep
sounds at regular intervals to inform
you.
Varying the limit speed
The speed limiter can be changed by
repeatedly pressing the switch 2:
– side a (+) to increase the speed;
– side b (-) to reduce the speed.
Driving
When a limited speed has been stored
and this speed is not reached, driving is
similar to driving a vehicle without the
speed limiter function.
Once you have reached the stored
speed, no effort on the accelera-
tor pedal will allow you to exceed
the programmed speed except in an
emergency (refer to information on
“Exceeding the limit speed”).
The speed limiter function is
in no way linked to the brak-
ing system.
a
b
2
2.69
SPEED LIMITER (3/3)
Recalling the limit speed
If a speed has been saved, it can be re-
called by pressing switch 3 (R).
Putting the function on
standby
The speed limiter function is sus-
pended when you press switch 4 (O).
In this case, the limit speed remains
stored and the message “Memorised”
accompanied by this speed appears on
the instrument panel.
Switching off the function
The speed limiter function is deac-
tivated if you press switch 1: in this
case a speed is no longer stored. The
orange instrument panel warning light
goes out, confirming that the func-
tion is stopped.
When the speed limiter is set to
standby, pressing on the side a (+)
of the switch 2 reactivates the func-
tion without taking into account the
memorised speed: it is the speed at
which the vehicle is moving that is
taken into account.
2
a
3
4
1
2.70
CRUISE CONTROL (1/4)
The cruise control function helps you to
maintain your driving speed at a speed
that you choose, called the cruising
speed.
This cruising speed may be set at any
speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function
is in no way linked to the
braking system.
This function is an addi-
tional driving aid. The func-
tion does not take the place
of the driver. Therefore, it
can under no circumstances replace
the driver’s responsibility to respect
speed limits and to be vigilant (the
driver must always be ready to
brake). Cruise control must not be
used in heavy traffic, on winding or
slippery roads (black ice, aquaplan-
ing, gravel) and during bad weather
(fog, rain, side winds etc.).
There is a risk of accidents.
Controls
1 Main “On/Off” switch.
2 Controls for:
a cruising speed activation, storage
and increase (+);
b decreasing cruising speed (-).
3 Activation with recall of saved cruis-
ing speed (R).
4 Switch the function to standby (with
cruising speed saved) (O).
2
a
b
3
4
1
2.71
CRUISE CONTROL (2/4)
Driving
Once a cruising speed is memorised
and the cruise control function is active,
you may lift your foot off the accelera-
tor pedal.
Please note that you must
keep your feet close to the
pedals in order to react in
an emergency.
Activating cruise control
At a steady speed (above approxi-
mately 18.6 mph (30 km/h)) press
switch 2 side a (+): the function is acti-
vated and the current speed is memo-
rised.
The cruising speed replaces the dashes
and cruise control is confirmed by the
appearance of the message “Check
cruise control” and the warning light
.
If you try to activate the function below
20 mph (30 km/h), the message “Invalid
speed” will be displayed and the func-
tion will remain inactive.
Switching on
Press switch 1 on side .
Indicator light
comes on, lit green,
and the message “Check cruise con-
trol” appears on the instrument panel,
accompanied by dashes to indicate that
the cruise control function is activated
and waiting to store a cruising speed.
2
a
1
2.72
CRUISE CONTROL (3/4)
Exceeding the cruising speed
The cruising speed may be exceeded
at any time by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. While overtaking, the cruis-
ing speed flashes red on the instrument
panel.
Then, release the accelerator: after a
few seconds, the vehicle will automati-
cally return to its set cruising speed.
Cruising speed cannot be
maintained
If driving up or down a steep gradi-
ent, the system is unable to maintain
the cruising speed: the stored speed is
flashes red on the instrument panel to
inform you of this situation.
Adjusting the cruising speed
The cruising speed can be changed by
pressing the switch 2 repeatedly:
– side a (+) to increase the speed;
– side b (-) to reduce the speed.
The cruise control function
is in no way linked to the
braking system.
2
a
b
2.73
CRUISE CONTROL (4/4)
Switching off the function
The cruise control function is deacti-
vated if you press switch 1: in this case
a speed is no longer stored. The green
warning light and message on the
instrument panel goes out to confirm
that the function is deactivated.
Returning to the cruising speed
If a speed is stored, it can be recalled,
once you are sure that the road con-
ditions are suitable (traffic, road sur-
face, weather conditions, etc.). Press
switch 3 (R) if the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (30 km/h).
When the stored speed is recalled,
activation of the cruise control is con-
firmed by the illumination of the cruis-
ing speed in green, along with the mes-
sage “Check cruise control”.
NB: if the speed previously stored is
much higher than the current speed,
the vehicle will accelerate more rapidly
to reach this threshold.
When the cruise control is set to
standby, pressing on the side a (+)
of the switch 2 reactivates the cruise
control function without taking into
account the stored speed: it is the
speed at which the vehicle is moving
that is taken into account.
Putting the function on
standby
The function is set to standby if you:
– use the switch 4 (O);
– the brake pedal;
– depress the clutch pedal or the shift
into neutral if the vehicle has an au-
tomatic gearbox.
In these three cases, the cruising
speed remains stored and the mes-
sage “Memorised” accompanied by this
speed appears on the instrument panel.
Standby is confirmed by the display of
the cruising speed in grey and the mes-
sage “Memorised”.
Putting the cruise control
on standby or switching it
off does not cause a rapid
reduction in speed: you
must brake by depressing the brake
pedal.
2
a
3
4
1
2.74
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (1/8)
The adaptive cruise control is a func-
tion which gives you the option, when
traffic conditions permit (large free-flow-
ing road or motorway), of maintaining
a chosen speed, known as the cruising
speed, while keeping a safe distance
from the vehicle in front in the same
lane.
The function can be adjusted from
31 mph (50 km/h) to 99.2 mph
(160 km/h).
The radar-camera has a range of
around 120 metres.
Note:
– the driver should take account of the
maximum legally permissible speed
in the country where the vehicle is
travelling;
– the adaptive cruise control can brake
the vehicle up to a third of the brak-
ing capacity. Depending on the situ-
ation, the driver may need to brake
harder.
This function is an addi-
tional driving aid.
Therefore, it can under no
circumstances replace the
driver’s responsibility to respect
speed limits and to be vigilant (the
driver must always be ready to
brake).
The adaptive cruise control should
not be used in heavy traffic, on
winding or slippery roads (black ice,
aquaplaning, gravel) and during bad
weather (fog, rain, side winds etc.).
There is a risk of accidents.
Location of the radar-
camera 1
Make sure the windscreen is not ob-
scured (dirt, mud, snow, condensation
etc.).
On equipped vehicles, some infor-
mation is given on the head-up dis-
play.
1
2.75
The cruising speed replaces the dashes
and cruise control is confirmed by the
appearance of the message “Adaptive
cruise ctrl” and the indicator light
.
If you try to activate the function below
31 mph (50 km/h) or above 99.2 mph
(160 km/h), the message “Invalid
speed” is displayed and the function re-
mains inactive.
Adjusting the following
distance
Pressing switch 6 multiple times ad-
justs the following distance.
Switching on
Press switch 5 on the side showing
.
Warning light
comes on, lit green,
and the message “Adaptive cruise ctrl”
appears on the instrument panel, ac-
companied by dashes to indicate that
the cruise control function is activated
and waiting to store a cruising speed.
Activating cruise control
At a steady speed (above approxi-
mately 31 mph (50 km/h)), press
switch 2 side a (+): the function is acti-
vated and the current speed is memo-
rised.
Controls
5 Main “On/Off” switch.
2 Controls for:
a cruising speed activation, storage
and increase (+);
b decreasing cruising speed (-).
3 Activation with recall of saved cruis-
ing speed (R).
4 Switch the function to standby (with
cruising speed saved) (O).
6 Adjusting following distance.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (2/8)
6
2
a
b
3
4
5
2.76
Driving
Once a cruising speed is memorised
and the cruise control function is active,
you may lift your foot off the accelera-
tor pedal.
If a following distance is stored and a
vehicle travelling slower than yours is
detected by the system in your lane,
your vehicle will brake (with the brake
lights on) and adapt its speed to that of
the vehicle in front, respecting the fol-
lowing distance selected previously.
Overtaking
If your speed is lower than the cruise
control and you wish to perform an
overtaking manoeuvre, activating the
direction indicator will provide acceler-
ation enabling the overtaking manoeu-
vre.
Please note that you must
keep your feet close to the
pedals in order to react in
an emergency.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (3/8)
Adjusting the cruising speed
The cruising speed can be changed by
pressing the switch 2 repeatedly:
– side a (+) to increase the speed;
– side b (-) to reduce the speed.
Varying the following
distance
You can vary the following distance
from the vehicle in front at any time by
pressing switch 6 repeatedly.
Horizontal following bars will be dis-
played on the instrument panel, indicat-
ing the following distance selected:
– one bar for a short distance (cor-
responding to a following time of
around one second);
– two bars for a medium distance;
– three bars for a long distance (cor-
responding to a following time of
around two seconds).
Choosing the distance should depend
on the traffic, the laws in your country,
and on the weather conditions.
If a vehicle is detected by the system in
your lane, an outline A of a vehicle will
appear above the following bars.
6
A
2
a
b
2.77
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (4/8)
Exceeding the cruising speed
The cruising speed may be exceeded
at any time by depressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
When exceeding this speed, the cruis-
ing speed and the following bars show
red and the cruising speed flashes on
the instrument panel: the distance con-
trol function is no longer activated.
Then, release the accelerator: cruise
and distance control will automatically
reactivate unless the function has been
set to standby.
Putting the function on
standby
The function is set to standby if:
– you press switch 4 (O);
– you depress the brake pedal;
– you depress the clutch pedal;
– you use the gear lever;
– the engine speed is too low or too
high;
– the vehicle speed is lower than
24.8 mph (40 km/h) or over
105.4 mph (170 km/h);
– certain driver correction devices and
aids are triggered (ABS, ESC, etc.)
In the latter two cases, the message
“Adaptive cruise ct disconnected” is
displayed on the instrument panel when
the function is set to standby.
Standby is confirmed by the display of
the cruising speed in grey and the mes-
sage “Adaptive cruise ctrl”.
Returning to the cruising speed
If a speed is stored, it can be recalled,
once you are sure that the road con-
ditions are suitable (traffic, road sur-
face, weather conditions, etc.). Press
switch 3 (R) if the vehicle speed is
above around 30 mph (50 km/h).
When the stored speed is recalled,
activation of the cruise control is con-
firmed by the illumination of the cruis-
ing speed in green, along with the mes-
sage “Adaptive cruise ctrl”.
When the cruise control is set to
standby, pressing switch 2, side a (+),
reactivates the cruise control function
without taking into account the stored
speed: it is the speed at which the vehi-
cle is moving that is taken into account.
2
a
3
4
2.78
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (5/8)
Putting the cruise control
on standby or switching it
off does not cause a rapid
reduction in speed: you
must brake by depressing the brake
pedal.
Please note that you must
keep your feet close to the
pedals in order to react in
an emergency.
Note: if the speed previously stored is
much higher than the current speed,
the vehicle will accelerate to reach this
threshold.
Under certain conditions (coming up
behind a vehicle moving more slowly,
rapid change of lane of vehicles in front
etc.), the system may not have time to
respond and may emit a beep along-
side the alert A when the situation re-
quires the driver’s attention, or the
alert B when the situation requires im-
mediate action from the driver.
React accordingly and perform the ap-
propriate manoeuvres.
A
B
2.79
5
Switching off the function
The cruise control function is stopped if
you press switch 5 on the
side; in
this case a speed is no longer stored.
The green
indicator light and the
message "Adaptive cruise ctrl” on the
instrument panel go out to confirm that
the function is deactivated.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (6/8)
Operating faults
When the system detects an operating
fault the message “Check cruise con-
trol” appears on the instrument panel.
There are two possibilities:
– the system is temporarily disrupted
(for example: radar obscured by
dirt, mud, snow etc.). In this case,
park the vehicle and switch off the
engine. Clean the detection zone of
the radar. When you next start the
engine, the warning light and the
message go out;
– otherwise, this may be caused by
another fault. Consult an approved
dealer
2.80
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (7/8)
This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care
and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of the system indications.
The system should under no circumstances be taken to be an obstacle detector or an anti-collision system.
System servicing/repairs
– In the event of an impact, the radar-camera alignment may be changed, and its operation may consequently be affected.
Deactivate the function and consult an authorised dealer.
– Any work in the area where the radar-camera is located (repairs, replacements, windscreen modifications etc.) must be car-
ried out by a qualified professional.
Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.
Deactivating the function
You must disable the function if:
– the brake lights are not functioning;
– the area of the radar-camera has been damaged (on the windscreen side or the interior rear-view mirror side);
– the vehicle is being towed (breakdowns);
– traffic is heavy;
– the vehicle is travelling in a tunnel;
– the vehicle is travelling on a windy road;
– the windscreen is cracked or distorted (do not carry out windscreen repairs in this area; have it changed by an Authorised
Dealer);
– the vehicle is travelling on a slippery road or in poor weather conditions (fog, snow, rain, side winds etc.).
In the event of the system behaving abnormally, deactivate it and consult an authorised dealer.
2.81
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (8/8)
Limitation of the system operation
– A vehicle travelling in the opposite direction will not trigger any alert or any action on the system operation.
– The radar-camera should be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the proper operation of the
system.
– Fixed obstacles (stationary vehicles, traffic jams, toll booths etc.) or objects travelling at low speed or of a small size (motor-
bikes, bicycles, pedestrians etc.) may not be detected by the system.
– A vehicle entering the same lane will only be detected once it has entered the detection zone. Sudden or late braking may
then take place.
– When entering a bend or curve, the radar-camera may temporarily no longer detect the vehicle in front, and this may lead
to acceleration.
– When exiting a curve, the detection of the vehicle in front may be affected or delayed. Sudden or late braking may then take
place.
– A slower vehicle travelling in an adjacent lane may be detected and cause a slowing down if one of the two vehicles is trav-
elling too close to the lane of the other.
– A slower vehicle with a wide difference in speed may not be taken into account by the system.
– The system is deactivated below around 31 mph (50 km/h). Drivers must react accordingly.
– Sudden changes in situation are not instantly taken into account by the system. Drivers must remain vigilant at all times and
under all circumstances.
System disturbance
Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:
– a complex environment (metal bridge, tunnel etc.) ;
– poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice etc.);
– poor visibility (night, fog etc.);
– poor contrast between objects;
– being dazzled (glaring sun, lights of vehicles travelling in the opposite direction etc.).
Risk of unwanted braking or acceleration.
2.82
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (1/5)
Operating principle
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumper
measure the distance between the ve-
hicle and an obstacle.
This measurement is indicated by
beeps which become more frequent the
closer you come to the obstacle, until
they become a continuous beep when
the vehicle is approximately 20 to
30 centimetres from the obstacle.
The system detects obstacles to the
front, the rear and the sides of the ve-
hicle.
The parking distance control system
is only activated when the vehicle is
driven at a speed below approximately
6 mph (10 km/h).
The parking distance control system
does not take into account towing and
load carrying systems etc.
This function is an addi-
tional aid that indicates the
distance between the vehi-
cle and an obstacle whilst
reversing, using sound signals.
Under no circumstances should it
replace the driver’s care or respon-
sibility whilst reversing.
The driver should always be ready
for sudden incidents while driv-
ing: always ensure that there are
no small, narrow moving obstacles
(such as a child, animal, pushchair,
bicycle, stone, post etc.) in the blind
spot when manoeuvring.
Special features
Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indi-
cated by arrows 1 are not obscured (by
dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
1
2.83
Operation
Most objects located less near the
front, rear and sides of the vehicle are
detected.
Depending on the distance of the ob-
stacle, the frequency of the beep will
be higher while approaching it, and
will become a continuous beep around
20 cm away for obstacles to the sides,
and around 30 cm for obstacles to the
front or rear. Green, orange and red
zones will be displayed on the dis-
play C.
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (2/5)
C
A B
2
Note: the display 2 shows the vehicle
surroundings and emits beeps.
It is necessary to travel a few metres
before the side detection is activated.
If all areas have a grey background, the
whole area around the vehicle is being
monitored:
– A: analysis of the vehicle surround-
ings in progress;
– B: analysis of the vehicle surround-
ings carried out.
2.84
An impact to the under-
side of the vehicle while
manoeuvring (e.g. strik-
ing a post, raised kerb or
other street furniture) may result in
damage to the vehicle (e.g. defor-
mation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have
your vehicle checked by an ap-
proved Dealer.
Detection of obstacles to the side
Depending on the direction of the
wheels, the system determines the tra-
jectory of the vehicle and notifies the
driver of any risk or otherwise of a col-
lision with an obstacle 3 to the side of
the vehicle.
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (3/5)
If a side obstacle is detected:
– the beeps become faster and then
sound continuously as the obstacle
gets nearer. Green, orange and red
zones will be displayed on the dis-
play D;
– if there is no risk of collision, no beep
will sound when approaching the ob-
stacle. Green, orange and red zones
will be displayed interspersed on the
display D.
Note: in the event of a change in tra-
jectory during a manoeuvre, the risk of
collision with an obstacles may be sig-
nalled late.
3
D
2.85
System sound
Enables the system sound to be
chosen.
Deactivating the system sound
Activate or deactivate the parking dis-
tance control sound.
Note: if you deactivate the sound, you
will no longer be notified with beeps
when approaching an obstacle.
Deactivating the system
Activate or deactivate parking distance
control.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
Vehicle stationary:
– press and hold the switch 5 OK to
access the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Driving as-
sistance” menu;
– press the switch 5 OK;
– repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Parking
distance control settings” menu;
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (4/5)
When the vehicle is being driven at
a speed below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h), certain noises (motorcy-
cle, lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may
trigger the beeping sound of the
parking distance control.
4
Adjustment
You can adjust certain settings from the
multifunction screen 4. Please see the
equipment instructions for further infor-
mation.
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
Select “Vehicle”, “Parking assistance”,
“Obstacle detection”.
Parking distance control audio
volume
Adjust the volume of the parking dis-
tance control by pressing + or -.
– press the switch 5 OK;
– using the control 6, select the set-
tings to be changed;
– press the switch 5 OK.
5
6
2.86
Automatic deactivation of the
parking distance control
The system deactivates:
– when the vehicle speed is above ap-
proximately 6 mph (10 km/h);
– depending on the model, when the
vehicle is stationary for more than
approximately 5 seconds and an ob-
stacle is detected (such as when in a
traffic jam, etc.);
– when the vehicle is in neutral for
manual gearboxes, or in position N
or P for automatic gearboxes.
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (5/5)
Operating faults
When the system detects an operating
fault, a beep sounds for approximately
3 seconds each time reverse gear is
selected and is accompanied by the
message “Check parking sensor” on
the instrument panel. Consult an ap-
proved dealer
2.87
REVERSING CAMERA (1/2)
4 moving guide line:
This is shown in blue on the multifunc-
tion screen 2. It indicates the vehicle
trajectory according to the position of
the steering wheel.
Special feature
Make sure that the camera is not ob-
scured (by dirt, mud, snow, condensa-
tion etc.).
Operation
When you change to reverse gear, the
camera 1 located on the tailgate pro-
vides a view of the area behind the
vehicle on the multimedia screen 2,
accompanied by one or two fixed or
moving guide lines 3 and 4.
This system is initially used with the aid
of several gauges (mobile for trajectory
and fixed for distance). When the red
zone is reached, use the bumper image
to stop accurately.
Fixed gauge 3
The fixed clearance gauge comprises
coloured markers A, B and C, indicat-
ing the distance behind the vehicle:
– A (red) approximately 30 centime-
tres from the vehicle;
– B (yellow) approximately 70 centi-
metres from the vehicle;
– C (green) approximately 150 centi-
metres from the vehicle.
This gauge remains fixed and indicates
the vehicle trajectory if the wheels are
in line with the vehicle.
1
2
4
C
B
A
3
3
4
2.88
This function is an additional
aid. It cannot, therefore,
under any circumstances
replace the vigilance or the
responsibility of the driver.
The driver should always be ready
for sudden incidents while driv-
ing: always ensure that there are
no small, narrow moving obstacles
(such as a child, animal, pushchair,
bicycle, stone, post etc.) in the blind
spot when manoeuvring.
The screen shows a reverse mirror
image.
The frames are a representation
projected on a flat surface. This in-
formation is to not be taken into ac-
count when superimposed on a
vertical object or an object on the
ground.
Objects which appear on the edge
of the screen may be deformed.
In very bright light (snow, vehicle in
sunshine etc.), the camera vision
may be adversely affected.
If the boot is open or poorly closed,
the message “Boot open” appears
and the camera display disappears.
You can also adjust the camera image
settings (brightness, contrast, etc.)
Activating, deactivating the
reversing camera
From the multifunction screen 2, select
“Vehicle”, “Settings”, “Parking as-
sistance”, then “Rear view camera”.
Activate or deactivate the reversing
camera and confirm your choice.
REVERSING CAMERA (2/2)
2
2.89
ASSISTED PARKING (1/4)
This function assists with parking ma-
noeuvres.
Take your hands off the steering wheel.
You only control the pedals and the
gear lever.
You can retake control at any time by
operating the steering wheel.
Switching on
With the vehicle at a standstill or driving
at less than approximately 18.6 mph
(30 km/h), press switch 1. The warn-
ing light integrated on switch 1 lights up
and the 2 screen appears on the multi-
function screen.
1
2
Special features
Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indi-
cated by arrows 3 are not obscured (by
dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
3
2.90
ASSISTED PARKING (2/4)
Choice of manoeuvre
The system can perform four types of
manoeuvres:
– parallel parking;
– perpendicular parking;
– angle parking;
– moving out of a parallel parking
space.
From the multifunction screen, select
the manoeuvre to be performed.
Note: when starting the vehicle, or after
having successfully completed parallel
parking using the system, the default
manoeuvre proposed by the system is
assistance in exiting a parallel parking
space. In other cases, the default ma-
noeuvre can be set from the multifunc-
tion screen.
Operation
Parking
As long as the vehicle speed is less
than 20 mph (30 km/h), the system
looks for available parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
Once a space has been found, it is dis-
played on the multifunction screen, in-
dicated by a small letter “P”. So that
the vehicle can detect a space, drive
slowly, with the indicators activated on
the same side as the space, until the
message "Stop” is displayed, along
with a beep.
The space is then indicated on the mul-
tifunction screen by a capital “P”.
– Stop the vehicle;
– select reverse gear.
The
indicator light lights up
on the instrument panel and a beep
sounds;
– release the steering wheel;
– follow the system instructions pro-
vided on the multifunction screen.
Your speed should not exceed around 4
mph (7 km/h).
Once the warning light
on the
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been com-
pleted.
2.91
ASSISTED PARKING (3/4)
Your speed should not exceed around
4 mph (7 km/h).
Once in position to exit the space, the
system will notify you of the end of the
manoeuvre.
Once the warning light
on the
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been com-
pleted.
Suspending the manoeuvre
The manoeuvre is suspended in the fol-
lowing circumstances:
– you take control of the wheel;
– a door or the boot is opened;
– the vehicle is at a standstill for too
long;
– an obstacle in the direction of move-
ment prevents the manoeuvre from
being completed;
– the engine will stop.
Once the warning light
on the
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been sus-
pended. To resume the manoeuvre,
press and hold the system activation
switch.
In this case, the reason for suspending
the manoeuvre will be displayed on the
multifunction screen.
Make sure:
– you have released the steering wheel
and;
– that all doors and the boot are closed,
and;
– that no obstacles are in the way of
the direction of movement, and;
– that the engine is started.
Cancelling the manoeuvre
The manoeuvre can be stopped in the
following cases:
– by pressing the system activation
switch;
– the vehicle speed has exceeded
4 mph (7 km/h);
– you have performed more than ten
forwards/backwards movements in
one manoeuvre;
– the parking distance control sensors
are dirty or blocked;
– the vehicle wheels have skidded.
Once the warning light
on the
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been com-
pleted.
Exiting a parallel parking space
– Select “Exit parallel parking space”
mode;
– activate the direction indicator on the
side you wish to go out of;
– press and hold switch 1 (around
2 seconds).
The
indicator light lights up
on the instrument panel and a beep
sounds;
– release the steering wheel;
– go forwards and backwards using
the parking distance control system
alerts.
1
2.92
ASSISTED PARKING (4/4)
This function is an additional driving aid. This function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the due care
and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
Make sure that the manoeuvre complies with the applicable traffic regulations at your location.
– The driver should always be ready for sudden incidents while driving: always ensure that there are no small, narrow moving
obstacles (such as a child, animal, pushchair, bicycle, stone, post etc.) in the blind spot when manoeuvring.
– The system cannot detect objects located in the sensor blind spots.
– When manoeuvring, the steering wheel may turn quickly: do not put your hands inside, and make sure that nothing is caught
inside.
– Always visually check that the parking space proposed by the system is still available and contains no obstacles.
– The system should only be used when towing a trailer or when there is a towing or load carrying system on the vehicle.
2.93
AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (1/3)
2
Operation
With the selection lever 1 in position P,
switch on the ignition.
To move out of position P, you must de-
press the brake pedal before pressing
the unlocking button 2.
With your foot on the brake pedal
(warning light
c on the display goes
out), move the lever out of position P.
Only engage D or R when the vehi-
cle is stopped, with your foot on the
brake and the accelerator pedal re-
leased.
1
B
Selector lever 1
P: park
R: reverse
N: Neutral
D: automatic mode
M: manual mode
+: upper gear
–: lower gear
The gear engaged is displayed on the
instrument panel B and on the dis-
play A.
Note: press button 2 to go from position
D or N to R or P.
Driving in automatic mode
Put lever 1 into position D.
In most road conditions you will en-
counter, you will not need to touch your
lever again: the gears will change au-
tomatically at the right time and at the
most suitable engine speed because
the automatic system takes into ac-
count the vehicle load and road contour
and adjusts itself to the particular driv-
ing style you have chosen.
Economical driving
When driving, always leave the lever
in position D, keeping the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed to ensure auto-
matic gear changes at a lower engine
speed.
Accelerating and overtaking
Depress the accelerator pedal firmly
and fully (so that it goes beyond the
kickdown point).
This will enable you to change down
to the optimum gear within the
engine range.
A
2.94
Special circumstances
– If the bends and road surface do
not allow you to stay in automatic
mode (e.g. in the mountains), we
recommend that you change to
manual mode. This will prevent the
automatic gearbox from changing
gear repeatedly when climbing, and
permit engine braking on long de-
scents.
– In cold weather, start the engine
and wait a few seconds before
moving the selector lever from posi-
tion P or N and engaging it in D or R
to prevent the engine stalling.
The gear selected is displayed on the
instrument panel.
Special cases
In certain driving conditions (result-
ing in, for example, engine protection,
operation of the Electronic Stability
Control programme: ESC etc.) the au-
tomated system may change the gear
automatically.
Likewise, to prevent incorrect manoeu-
vres, a gear change may be refused by
the automatic system: in this case the
gear display flashes for a few seconds
as a warning.
AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (2/3)
Driving in manual mode
Move the selector lever 1 to position D,
then move the lever to the right into po-
sition M.
Shifting the lever repeatedly allows you
to change gears manually:
– to move down through the gears,
push the lever forwards;
– to move up through the gears, push
the lever backwards.
1
When facing uphill, to remain
stopped, do not keep your foot on
the accelerator.
Risk of overheating the automatic
gearbox.
Check that the indicator
light P on the instrument
panel is activated before
leaving the vehicle.
Risk of loss of immobilisation of
the vehicle
2.95
AUTOMATIC GEARBOX (3/3)
Operating faults
– when driving, if the message
"CHECK AUTO GEARBOX" ap-
pears on the instrument panel, it in-
dicates a failure.
Contact your approved Dealer as
soon as possible;
– when driving, if the message
"Gearbox overheating" appears on
the instrument panel, stop as soon
as possible to let the gearbox cool
down and wait for the message to
disappear;
– If a vehicle with an automatic
gearbox breaks down, refer to the
information on “Towing” in Section 5.
For safety reasons, do not
switch off the ignition before
the vehicle has come to a
complete standstill.
Parking the vehicle
When the vehicle is stopped, move
the lever to position P while keeping
your foot on the brake pedal: the drive
wheels are mechanically locked by the
driveshaft.
Ensure that the electronic parking
brake is engaged.
An impact to the under-
side of the vehicle while
manoeuvring (e.g. strik-
ing a post, raised kerb or
other street furniture) may result in
damage to the vehicle (e.g. defor-
mation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have
your vehicle checked by an ap-
proved Dealer.
When activated, in the event that the
lever is stuck in P, depress the brake
paddle. It is possible to free the lever
manually. To do this, unclip the base of
the lever, then insert a tool (rigid rod)
into the slot 3 (located on the left or
right of the lever depending on the ve-
hicle) and press simultaneously on the
button 2 to unlock the lever.
Contact an authorised dealer as soon
as possible.
3
2
2.96
3.1
Section 3: Your comfort
multi-Sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Manual air conditioning/heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Air conditioning: information and advice on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
Outside air quality and deodorisation function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Multimedia equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Fixed glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
Sun visor/blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Passenger compartment storage/fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Accessories socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Rear headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
Luggage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45
Rear parcel shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47
Luggage compartment storage space and fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48
Transporting objects in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
Transporting objects: towbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
Luggage net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Roof bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.54
3.2
MULTI-SENSE (1/2)
The Multi-Sense system enables once
of five modes to be selected which, de-
pending on the vehicle, affect the drive,
the light environment, the comfort and
the engine noise:
– modes Comfort , Neutral, Eco and
Sport are preset and associated with
customisable light environments and
engine noise;
– mode Perso is fully customisable.
The drive modes affect the:
– power-assisted steering;
– engine and gearbox responsiveness;
– heating level.
They also affect the:
– passenger compartment and instru-
ment panel lighting;
– instrument panel and multifunction
screen information;
– engine noise;
– massage seat.
After each start-up, the vehicle uses the
mode set at the time the engine was
last switched off.
Mode Comfort
This mode favours smooth steering.
The interior environment is softened.
Mode Neutral
Default mode, mode Neutral selects the
vehicle factory settings.
Mode Eco
Mode Eco is geared towards saving
energy and the environment. The
steering is smooth, engine and gearbox
management enable fuel consumption
to be lowered. Air conditioning is man-
aged to be used only when necessary.
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in
Section 2.
Multi-Sense
Sport
Eco
Neutral
Comfort Perso
In all modes, it is possible to change
the colour of the ambient lighting as
well as the format of the information
displayed on the instrument panel
and multifunction display.
You can also reset to the default set-
tings.
3.3
MULTI-SENSE (2/2)
Sport mode
This mode enables an increased re-
sponsiveness from the engine and the
gearbox. The steering is firmer.
Mode Perso
This mode enables you to manually
configure the drive, light environment
and, depending on the vehicle, the
comfort and engine noise.
3
Stopping the engine in Sport
mode, or Perso mode with engine
setting in Sport mode.
When you restart the vehicle, a mes-
sage asks you if you wish to keep
the engine setting in Sportmode.
Accessing the menu
You can access Multi-Sense, depend-
ing on the vehicle:
– from the multifunction screen 1.
Select menu “Vehicle” then “Multi-
Sense”;
– using switch 2;
– using button Eco 3 which automati-
cally launches Eco mode and opens
the “Multi-Sense” menu on the multi-
function screen 1 for a few seconds.
1
2
3.4
AIR VENTS: air outlets (1/2)
1 side window demister outlets
2 side air vents
3 windscreen demister outlet
4 centre air vents
5 passenger footwell heater outlets
6 multifunction screen
7 rear air vents
31 2
5
5
14
6
7
2
5
5
7
3.5
AIR VENTS: air outlets (2/2)
To remove bad odours from your ve-
hicles, only use the systems designed
for this purpose. Consult an approved
Dealer.
8
9
9
Front seats
Direction
Up/down: lower or raise tabs 8.
Air flow
Turn control knob 9.
To fully close, turn beyond the point of
resistance.
Do not add anything to the
vehicle’s ventilation circuit
(for example, to remove
bad odours).
There is a risk of damage or of
fire.
10
2nd row rear seats
Output/direction
Move the cursor 10:
– downwards to decrease the air flow
and direct it downwards;
– upwards to increase the air flow and
direct it upwards;
– to the right or left.
8
3.6
The controls
1 Adjusting the air temperature.
2 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen
and, depending on the vehicle, the
door mirrors.
3 Air conditioning.
4 Air recirculation.
5 Adjusting air distribution in the pas-
senger compartment.
6 Adjusting the ventilation fan speed.
7 Adjusting the ventilation speed and
stopping the system.
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (1/3)
Switching air conditioning on
or off
The air conditioning is switched on (in-
dicator light on) or off (indicator light off)
using the control 3.
The air conditioning system is used
for:
– lowering the temperature inside the
passenger compartment;
– eliminating condensation more
quickly.
Indicators
The following indicators are displayed
on the multimedia screen A:
8 Air temperature.
9 Active mode.
10 Fan speed.
11 Distribution of air in the passenger
compartment.
21
7
3
4
8
9
10
11
A
5
6
3.7
Air recirculation is for:
– isolating the vehicle from the exter-
nal atmosphere (driving in polluted
areas, etc.);
– lowering the passenger compart-
ment temperature as quickly as pos-
sible.
Switching the air
recirculation on
Press the control 4: the integrated in-
dicator light in the button comes on.
Under these conditions, air is taken
from the passenger compartment and
is recirculated, with no air being taken
from outside the vehicle.
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (2/3)
Prolonged use of air recirculation can lead to condensation forming on the side
windows and windscreen, and discomfort due to the use of non-renewed air in
the passenger compartment. We therefore advise you to return to normal mode
(external air) as soon as the air recirculation function is no longer required, by
pressing the control 4 again.
Distribution of air in the
passenger compartment
There are five air distribution options.
Turn control 5 to choose the distribution
option.
The air distribution is displayed on the
multimedia screen.
õ
The air flow is directed to the
windscreen and the front side
window demisting vents.
÷
The air flow is distributed be-
tween all the air vents, the
front side window demisting vents, the
windscreen demisting vents and the
footwells.
ó
The air flow is directed mainly
towards the footwells.
G
The air flow is directed towards
the dashboard air vents, the
front footwells and, depending on the
vehicle, the second row footwells.
J
All the air flow is directed to the
dashboard vents.
4
5
3.8
Varying the ventilation speed
You can adjust the fan speed by press-
ing the controls 6 or 7 to increase or
reduce the fan speed.
The system is stopped (OFF): the venti-
lation speed is zero (vehicle stationary).
You can, however, still feel a slight flow
of air when the vehicle is moving.
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (3/3)
Adjusting the air temperature
Turn control 1 to obtain the desired
temperature. The more bars are dis-
played on the multimedia screen, the
higher the temperature.
When the air conditioning system is
used for long periods, it may begin to
feel cold. To increase the temperature,
turn control 1 to the right.
Rear screen de-icing/
demisting
With the engine running, press the
control 2. The operating tell-tale comes
on.
This function permits rapid demisting/
de-icing of the rear screen and de-icing
of the door mirrors (on equipped vehi-
cles).
To exit this function, press the con-
trol 2 again.
Demisting automatically stops.
Stopping the system
To switch off the system, press the
control 7 several times until the mes-
sage “OFF” appears on the multimedia
screen.
You may, however, feel a slight flow of
air when the vehicle is moving.
21
7
5
6
3.9
10
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (1/5)
15
6
5
4
3
9
12
16
17
18
19
11
Controls A
Press zone 14 to access the multifunc-
tion screen controls 1. The presence of
the controls detailed below will depend
on the vehicle model.
2 and 7 Left and right temperature indi-
cation adjustment.
3 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen
and, depending on the vehicle, the
door mirrors.
4, 8, 9 and 10 automatic modes
5 Air recirculation.
6 “Clear View” function.
11 and 18 Ventilation speeds.
12 Passenger compartment air distri-
bution.
13 Right and left temperature display.
14 Zone displaying air conditioning set-
tings.
15 “DUAL” function.
16 “Automatic recirculation” function.
17 Air conditioning.
19 Stopping the system.
Automatic mode
The automatic climate control system
guarantees comfort in the passen-
ger compartment and good visibility
(except in the event of extreme condi-
tions), while optimising consumption.
The system controls the ventilation
speed, air distribution, air recirculation,
and starting and stopping the air condi-
tioning and air temperature.
This mode consists of a choice of three
programmes:
NORMAL : allows the selected comfort
level to be best attained, depending on
the exterior conditions. Press button 4
or key 9.
SOFT: reaches the desired comfort
level more gently and silently. Press
button 8.
FAST: increases the flow of air in the
passenger compartment. This mode
is recommended in particular to opti-
mise comfort in the rear seats. Press
button 10.
8
14
13
7
2
13
1
Some buttons have a warning light
indicating their operative state.
A
Climate
3.10
Varying the ventilation speed
In automatic mode, the system uses
the most suitable amount of air to reach
and maintain the desired comfort level.
You can still adjust the ventilation speed
by pressing buttons 11 or 18 or by slid-
ing your finger in zone 20.
Temperature adjustment
There are two types of settings:
– uniform passenger compartment
setting;
– DUAL function setting to independ-
ently adjust the left and right sides.
Uniform passenger compartment
setting
Use control 7.
DUAL function setting
Press button 15 to activate. Use con-
trol 7 to adjust the left side and control 2
for the right side.
The displayed temperature values
show a comfort level.
When starting the engine, increas-
ing or decreasing the value dis-
played will not allow the com-
fort level to be reached any more
quickly. The system will always op-
timise the temperature increase or
decrease (the ventilation system
does not start instantly at maximum
speed: it gradually increases). This
may take several minutes.
Generally speaking, unless there is
a particular reason not to, the dash-
board air vents should remain open.
4
7
2
10
15
9
18
19
11
8
14
Note: the air conditioning configura-
tion depends on the mode selected in
the “Multi-Sense” menu (please refer
to the information on “Multi-Sense” in
Section 3).
20
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (2/5)
Climate
3.11
Press button 6 – the integrated indica-
tor light comes on.
Press button 3 to stop the heated rear
screen operating, and the integrated in-
dicator goes out.
To adjust the ventilation speed: press
buttons 11 or 18 or slide your finger in
zone 20.
Clear View function
This function quickly demists and de-
ices the windscreen, the rear screen,
the front side windows, and the door
mirrors (depending on the vehicle). It
imposes automatic operation of the
air conditioning and rear screen de-ic-
ing and, depending on the vehicle, the
windscreen electric de-icer.
10
9
18
11
8
20
To exit this function, press either:
– button 4;
– again button 6;
– on button 8, 9 or 10.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (3/5)
Climate
6
4
3
3.12
Switching air conditioning on
or off
In automatic mode, the system switches
the air conditioning system on or off,
depending on the climate conditions.
Press button 17 to:
– activate the air conditioning (a warn-
ing light in zone 14 comes on);
– deactivate the air conditioning (the
warning light in zone 14 goes out).
17
19
14
Stopping the system
Press button 19 to activate or deacti-
vate the system (the operating warn-
ing light on button 19 notifies you of the
system status).
It is preferable to use one of the automatic programmes NORMAL, SOFT or
FAST.
In automatic mode (4 warning light is lit), all air conditioning functions are control-
led by the system.
You can still change the selection made by the system. In this case, the indicator
light for button 4 goes out.
To return to automatic mode, press one of the programmes NORMAL 9, SOFT 8
or FAST10 or the button 4.
Rear screen de-icing/
demisting
Press button 3 – the integrated indica-
tor light comes on. This function en-
ables rapid demisting or de-icing of the
rear screen and de-icing of the door
mirrors (on equipped vehicles).
To exit this function, press button 3
again. Demisting automatically stops.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (4/5)
10
9
8
Climate
4
3
3.13
Automatic usage
Press button 16 (a warning light comes
on in zone 14).
Manual use
Press button 5 to force air recirculation.
Prolonged use of this position may lead
to odours, caused by non-renewal of
air, and the formation of condensation
on the windows.
We advise you to return to automatic
mode as soon as air recirculation is no
longer needed, by pressing key 16 or
button 5 again.
To exit this function, press key 16 or
button 5 again.
Adjusting the distribution
of air in the passenger
compartment
Press buttons 12 to select the desired
distribution (a warning light is displayed
in zone 14):
Ø
The air flow is mainly directed
to the demisting vents for the
windscreen and the side windows.
½
The air flow is mainly directed
to the dashboard air vents.
¿
The air flow is directed mainly
towards the footwells.
The demisting/de-icing will still take
priority over the air recirculation.
12
16
14
Air recirculation
This function is managed automatically
but you can also activate it manually.
Note:
– during recirculation, air is taken from
the passenger compartment and
is recycled, with no air being taken
from outside the vehicle;
– air recirculation allows the exter-
nal atmosphere to be cut off (when
driving in polluted areas, etc.) and
to cool the passenger compartment
temperature more quickly.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (5/5)
Climate
5
3.14
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (1/5)
Indicators
The following indicators are displayed
on the screen 3:
1 Active mode, ventilation speed and
air distribution in the passenger com-
partment (temporary display after
pressing the associated controls).
2 Outside air temperature.
4 Air temperature, left and right.
Automatic mode
The automatic climate control system
guarantees comfort in the passen-
ger compartment and good visibility
(except in the event of extreme condi-
tions), while optimising consumption.
The system controls the ventilation
speed, air distribution, air recirculation,
and starting and stopping the air condi-
tioning and air temperature.
This mode consists of a choice of three
programmes:
AUTO: allows the selected comfort
level to be best attained, depending
on the exterior conditions. Press the
button 15.
SOFT: reaches the desired comfort
level more gently and silently. Press the
button 14.
FAST: increases the flow of air in the
passenger compartment. This mode is
recommended in particular to optimise
comfort in the rear seats. Press the
button 16.
10
Some buttons have a warning light
indicating their operative state.
11
13 14
15
12
89
6
Controls B and C
5 and 11 Left and right temperature in-
dication adjustment.
6 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen
and, depending on the vehicle, the
door mirrors.
7 Passenger compartment air distribu-
tion.
8 “Automatic recirculation” function.
9 Air recirculation.
10 “Clear View” function.
12 and 18 Ventilation speeds.
13 “DUAL" function.
14, 15, and 16 Automatic modes.
17 Air conditioning.
7
18
5
17
16
1
4
4
2
10
11
13 14
15
12
89
6
7
18
5
17
16
1
4
4
2
B
C
3
3
3.15
Varying the ventilation speed
In automatic mode, the system uses
the most suitable amount of air to reach
and maintain the desired comfort level.
You can still adjust the ventilation
speed by pressing buttons 12 or 18 or,
depending on the vehicle, by sliding
your finger in zone 19.
Temperature adjustment
There are two types of settings:
– uniform passenger compartment
setting;
– “DUAL” function setting to independ-
ently adjust the left and right sides.
Uniform passenger compartment
setting
Use control 11.
“DUAL” function setting
Press button 13 to activate. Use con-
trol 11 to adjust the left side and con-
trol 5 for the right side.
The displayed temperature values
show a comfort level.
When starting the engine, increas-
ing or decreasing the value dis-
played will not allow the com-
fort level to be reached any more
quickly. The system will always op-
timise the temperature increase or
decrease (the ventilation system
does not start instantly at maximum
speed: it gradually increases). This
may take several minutes.
Generally speaking, unless there is
a particular reason not to, the dash-
board air vents should remain open.
Note: the air conditioning configura-
tion depends on the mode selected in
the “Multi-Sense” menu (please refer
to the information on “Multi-Sense” in
Section 3).
11
1312
18
5
11
13
12
18
5
19
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (2/5)
3.16
Press button 10 – the integrated indica-
tor light comes on.
Press button 6 to stop the heated rear
screen operating, and the integrated in-
dicator goes out.
To adjust the ventilation speed: press
buttons 12 or 18 or slide your finger in
zone 19.
Clear View function
This function quickly demists and de-
ices the windscreen, the rear screen,
the front side windows, and the door
mirrors (depending on the vehicle). It
imposes automatic operation of the
air conditioning and rear screen de-ic-
ing and, depending on the vehicle, the
windscreen electric de-icer.
To exit this function, press either:
– again button 10;
– one of the buttons 14, 15 or 16.
14
15
12
6
18
16
19
10 10
14
15
12
6
18
16
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (3/5)
3.17
Switching air conditioning on
or off
In automatic mode, the system switches
the air conditioning system on or off,
depending on the climate conditions.
Press button 17 to:
– activate the air conditioning (a warn-
ing light in zone 1 comes on);
– deactivate the air conditioning (the
warning light in zone 1 goes out).
Rear screen de-icing/
demisting
Press button 6 – the integrated indica-
tor light comes on. This function en-
ables rapid demisting or de-icing of the
rear screen and de-icing of the door
mirrors (on equipped vehicles).
To exit this function, press button 6
again. Demisting automatically stops.
It is preferable to use one of the automatic programmes AUTO, SOFT or
FAST.
In automatic mode (indicator light on button 14, 15 or 16 lit), all air conditioning
functions are controlled by the system.
You can still change the selection made by the system. In this case, the indicator
light for button 14, 15 or 16 goes out.
To return to automatic mode, press one of programmes AUTO 15, SOFT 14 or
FAST 16.
15
6
17
15
6
17
14
16
14
16
1
1
Stopping the system
To switch the system off, press
button 12 repeatedly until the message
OFF appears in zone 1.
12
12
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (4/5)
3.18
Automatic usage
Press button 8 (a warning light comes
on in zone 1).
Manual use
Press button 9 to force air recirculation.
Prolonged use of this position may lead
to odours, caused by non-renewal of
air, and the formation of condensation
on the windows.
We advise you to return to automatic
mode as soon as air recirculation is no
longer needed, by pressing button 8 or
button 9 again.
To exit this function, press button 8 or
button 9 again.
Adjusting the distribution
of air in the passenger
compartment
Press buttons 7 to select the desired
distribution (a warning light is displayed
in zone 1):
Ø
The air flow is mainly directed
to the demisting vents for the
windscreen and the side windows.
½
The air flow is mainly directed
to the dashboard air vents.
¿
The air flow is directed mainly
towards the footwells.
The demisting/de-icing will still take
priority over the air recirculation.
Air recirculation
This function is managed automatically
but you can also activate it manually.
Note:
– during recirculation, air is taken from
the passenger compartment and
is recycled, with no air being taken
from outside the vehicle;
– air recirculation allows the exter-
nal atmosphere to be cut off (when
driving in polluted areas, etc.) and
to cool the passenger compartment
temperature more quickly.
89 7
89 7
1
1
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (5/5)
3.19
Operating faults
As a general rule, contact your ap-
proved dealer in the event of an oper-
ating fault.
– Reduction in de-icing, demisting
or air conditioning performance.
This may be caused by the passen-
ger compartment filter cartridge be-
coming clogged.
– No cold air is being produced.
Check that the controls are set cor-
rectly and that the fuses are sound.
Otherwise, switch off the system.
Presence of water under the
vehicle
After prolonged use of the air condi-
tioning system, it is normal for water
to be present under the vehicle. This is
caused by condensation.
AIR CONDITIONING: information and advice on use
Do not open the refriger-
ant fluid circuit. The fluid
may damage eyes or skin.
Fuel consumption
You will normally notice an increase in
fuel consumption (especially in town)
when the air conditioning is operating.
For vehicles fitted with air conditioning
with no automatic mode, switch off the
system when it is not required.
Advice for reducing consumption
and helping to preserve the environ-
ment
Drive with the air vents open and the
windows closed.
If the vehicle has been parked in the
sun, open the doors for a few moments
to let the hot air escape before starting
the engine.
Advice on use
In some situations, (air conditioning
off, air recirculation activated, ventila-
tion speed at zero or low, etc.) you may
notice that condensation starts to form
on the windows and windscreen.
If there is condensation, use the “Clear
View” function to remove it, then use
the air conditioning in automatic mode
to stop it forming again.
Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Document
for your vehicle for the inspection fre-
quency.
Do not add anything to the
vehicle’s ventilation circuit
(for example, to remove
bad odours).
There is a risk of damage or of
fire.
3.20
OUTSIDE AIR QUALITY AND DEODORISATION FUNCTION
With the air conditioning switched
on, from the screen A, select Menu,
Vehicle, Take care.
Outside air quality
The air quality is given using a graph on
the multifunction screen.
Three colours indicate the air quality
level (from the cleanest to the most
polluted):
1 (blue)
2 (light grey)
3 (grey)
A
Deodorisation function
This reduces unpleasant odours in the
passenger compartment.
Deodorization cycle
– ON: helps to reduce the unpleasant
odour more quickly in the passenger
compartment,
– OFF: stop the function.
Note:
The function is on a timer. It stops auto-
matically after a few minutes.
Take care
On
Deodorization cycle
Please refer to the multimedia in-
structions for further information.
3.21
MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT (1/2)
Using the telephone
We remind you of the need
to conform to the legislation
in force concerning the use
of such equipment.
Hands-free telephone
integrated control
For equipped vehicles, use the steering
wheel controls 3.
Multimedia systems
The location and operation of equip-
ment may vary according to the vehicle.
1 Multimedia touchscreen display;
2 Steering column controls;
3 Steering wheel controls;
4 or 5 microphone.
1
3
Refer to the equipment instructions
for information on how to operate
this equipment.
2
4
5
3.22
Multimedia sockets 6
You can use sockets USB or the SD
card reader to access the multime-
dia content of your accessories and
the system update (please refer to the
equipment instructions).
The various sources can be selected
from the multifunction screen and from
the steering column controls.
7
MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT (2/2)
Multimedia sockets 7
Sockets USB can only recharge acces-
sories with a maximum power rating
of 12 Watts (voltage: 5V) per socket,
which have been approved by our
Technical Department.
The JACK socket enables the radio to
be used with an auxiliary cable.
The sockets USB can also recharge ac-
cessories with a maximum power rating
of 12 Watts (voltage: 5V) per socket,
which have been approved by our
Technical Department.
The JACK socket enables the radio to
be used with an auxiliary cable.
Connect accessories with a
maximum power of 12 watts
only.
Fire hazard.
6
3.23
ELECTRIC WINDOWS (1/2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
These systems operate:
– with the engine running;
– with the ignition off until one of the
front doors is opened (limited to ap-
proximately 12 minutes).
– before starting, with the front doors
closed, after pressing the start
button.
Press the window switch down or pull it
up to lower or raise the window to the
desired height: the rear windows do not
open fully.
Safety of rear occupants
The driver can prevent operation of the rear electric windows by pressing
switch 4. A confirmation message is displayed on the instrument panel.
Driver’s responsibility
Never leave your vehicle with the RENAULT card or key inside, and never leave
a child, adult who is not self-sufficient or a pet, even for a short while. They may
pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine or activating equip-
ment (such as the gear lever or electric windows). If any part of the body becomes
trapped, reverse the direction of the window immediately by pressing the relevant
switch.
Risk of serious injury.
Avoid resting any objects against
a half-open window: there is a risk
that the electric window could be
damaged.
From the driver’s seat, use switch:
1 for the driver’s side;
2 for the front passenger side;
3 and 5 for the rear passenger win-
dows.
From the passenger seats, use
switch 6.
3.24
Operating faults
In case of a fault when closing a
window, the system reverts to normal
mode: pull the switch concerned up
as often as necessary to fully close
the window, then hold the switch (still
on the closure side) for approximately
one second, then lower and raise the
window fully to reinitialise the system.
If necessary, contact an approved
Dealer.
ELECTRIC WINDOWS (2/2)
Remote control window
closing
(vehicles with 4 one-touch electric win-
dows).
When you lock the doors from the out-
side, press the locking button on the
RENAULTcard twice in quick suc-
cession, or on the driver's door in
hands-free mode, and all the windows
will close automatically (and, depend-
ing on the vehicle, the sunroof).
It is recommended that the user only
operates the system when the vehi-
cle can be seen clearly and no one is
inside.
One-touch mode
This mode works in addition to the ope-
ration of the electric windows described
previously.
Briefly press or pull the window switch
fully: the window is fully lowered or
raised. Pressing the switch again stops
the window moving.
Note: if the window detects resistance
when closing (e.g. tree branch, etc.), it
stops and then lowers again by a few
centimetres.
When closing the windows,
ensure that no part of the
body (arm, hand, etc.) is
protruding from the vehicle.
Risk of serious injury.
3.25
FIXED GLASS ROOF
To slide the curtain 1
With the ignition on:
– full opening: move the mark 3 on
the button 2 towards position B. The
marks in between correspond to the
intermediate positions of the sun-
blind.
– to close: move mark 3 on button 2
to position 0.
1
Driver’s responsibility
Never leave your vehicle
with the RENAULT card or
key inside, and never leave
a child, adult who is not self-suffi-
cient or a pet, even for a short while.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or by locking the
doors.
If something gets trapped, reverse
the direction of travel as soon as
possible by turning button 2 fully to
the right (position B).
Risk of serious injury.
3
0
A
B
2
Special features
If the fixed sunroof blind detects resist-
ance when closing (arm etc.), it stops
and then moves back several centime-
tres.
Operating fault
If the blind will not close, turn switch 2
to position A or B to open the blind,
then turn switch 2 to position 0 until the
blind is fully closed.
If the blockage persists, contact an ap-
proved dealer.
2
3.26
When the doors or boot are un-
locked and opened, the reading and
footwell lights come on temporarily.
1
INTERIOR LIGHTING (1/2)
1
Map reading lights
Press switch 1 to get:
– permanent lighting;
– immediate switching off.
Note: for vehicles fitted with a multi-
function screen, you can use the mul-
tifunction screen to deactivate/acti-
vate the courtesy lights which come on
when the doors or luggage compart-
ment are opened. To do this, please
refer to “Vehicle settings customisation
menu” in Section 1.
1
2
Footwell lights
The lights 2 come on when the doors
are opened.
3.27
Boot lights
Light 5 comes on when the luggage
compartment is opened.
INTERIOR LIGHTING (2/2)
5
Glove box light 4
Light 4 comes on when the cover is
opened.
4
Centre console storage
compartment light
The light 3 comes on when the storage
compartment is opened.
3
3.28
SUN VISOR, BLINDS
Front sun visor
Lower the sun visor 1 on the wind-
screen or unclip it and lower it over the
side window.
Vanity mirror
Slide cover 2, depending on the vehi-
cle, and the mirror is lit.
Lateral sun visor
Pull the sun visor upwards using the
tab 4 until the hooks 5 engage in their
housings (make sure the hooks are
properly locked in position).
4
5
2
1
Front sun visors
(depending on vehicle)
Slide the blind 3. This allows you to
block out the sun in the area above the
interior rear-view mirror.
Note: do not use the front sun blind
when the sun visor is placed against
the side window.
3
3.29
Passenger storage drawer 3
To open, move your fingers into area 4 -
it will open by itself. If on a steep slope,
assist the drawer opening by pulling the
handle 5. It can hold A4 documents. It
is ventilated and refrigerated.
Dashboard storage
compartment 2
Door pockets 1
It can hold a bottle.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (1/8)
1
Nothing should be placed
on the floor area in front of
the driver as such objects
may slide under the pedal
during braking manoeuvres, thus
obstructing its use.
Ensure that no hard, heavy
or pointed objects are
placed in the “open” sto-
rage compartments in such
a way that they may fall onto pas-
sengers during sudden turning or
braking.
2
Maximum load allowed in the pas-
senger storage compartment: 6 kg,
evenly distributed.
When driving, ensure
that the storage drawer is
closed. Risk of injury.
3
4
5
3.30
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (2/8)
Cup holders 7
8
9
When turning corners,
accelerating or braking,
ensure that the recepta-
cle being held by the cup
holder is not dislodged.
There is a risk of burning if hot
liquid escapes.
7
Passenger storage
compartment
Pull handle 6 to open it.
The glove box can hold A4-size docu-
ments, a large bottle of water, etc.
The storage compartment is ventilated
and refrigerated.
6
Central storage
compartment 8
Slide the curtain 9 to open the storage
compartment.
3.31
12
Central storage
compartment 12
Lift up the armrest 11.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (3/8)
Central armrest 11
11
Storage drawer under
driver’s seat 10
This drawer can hold a road atlas, the
vehicle documentation etc.
Nothing should be placed
on the floor area in front of
the driver as such objects
may slide under the pedal
during braking manoeuvres, thus
obstructing its use.
10
3.32
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (4/8)
Centre console 13
To move the centre console forward
or backward (movement B), press the
button 14 and slide the console. Once
in position, release the button and
check that it is correctly locked.
B
13
In cases of intensive use, a protective
system will prevent it from operating for
a few minutes.
In any case, the load must not
exceed 6 kg.
14
B
13
3.33
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (5/8)
Storage compartment 15
Cup holders 16
This can be used for storing a mobile
ashtray, cup holder, etc.
15
16
17
Front and rear underfloor
storage 17
These compartments can hold road
maps, manuals, cloths, etc.
Nothing should be placed
on the floor area in front of
the driver as such objects
may slide under the pedal
during braking manoeuvres, thus
obstructing its use.
3.34
Cup holders 19Rear armrest with cup holder
Lower armrest 18.
18
When turning corners,
accelerating or braking,
ensure that the recepta-
cle being held by the cup
holder is not dislodged.
There is a risk of burning if hot
liquid escapes.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (6/8)
19
3.35
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (7/8)
Ensure that no hard, heavy
or pointed objects are
placed in the “open” stor-
age compartments in such
a way that they may fall onto pas-
sengers during sudden turning or
braking.
Storage drawer 21 under the
centre console
21
Rear door storage
compartment 20
20
Nothing should be placed
on the floor area in front of
the driver as such objects
may slide under the pedal
during braking manoeuvres, thus
obstructing its use.
Front seat storage pockets 22
22
3.36
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (8/8)
Rear parcel shelf 23
Retaining straps 24
They can be used, for example, to
retain a multimedia tablet etc.
23
26
27
Grab handle 26
This offers support and can be held
when the vehicle is being driven.
Do not use it for getting into or out of
the vehicle.
Clothes hooks 27
24
For a multimedia tablet
Attach the upper section of the parcel
shelf using the straps 24 and place the
lower section in one of the housings 25.
24
25
3.37
ASHTRAY/CIGAR LIGHTER/ACCESSORIES SOCKET
Cigarette lighter 1
With the ignition on, push in cigar
lighter 1. It will spring back with a click
when it is ready. Pull it out to use. After
use, replace it without pushing it all the
way in.
Ashtray location 2
Accessories sockets
You can use the one of the sockets 1
or 3. They are provided for connecting
accessories approved by our Technical
Department.
Connect accessories with
a maximum power of
120 watts (12 V) only.
When several accessory
sockets are used at the same time,
the total power of the connected
accessories must not exceed
180 watts.
Fire hazard.
If your vehicle is not fitted with a
cigar lighter and an ashtray, these
can be obtained from an authorised
dealer.
1
2
3
3
3.38
To adjust the angle of the
headrest
Depending on the vehicle, move sec-
tion A towards or away from you to the
required position.
To adjust side supports
Depending on the vehicle, sections B
can be adjusted independently to the
desired position.
Storage position 2 for the
headrest
Press tab 1 and lower the headrest
completely.
REAR HEADRESTS
Position for use
Lift the headrest fully until it locks.
To remove the headrest
Lower the seatback slightly, press the
tab 1 and remove the headrest.
To refit the headrest
Insert the headrest rods into the
sleeves, and lower the headrest until it
locks.
2
The headrest is a safety
component; check that it is
fitted and in the correct po-
sition. The top of the head-
rest should be as close as possible
to the top of the head.
1
B
A
B
When the headrest is set at the
lowest position, this is for storage
only. It should not be in this position
when a seat is occupied.
3.39
To move the seats forwards
or backwards
Lift lever 1 to unlock the seat. Once in
the desired position, release the lever
and check that the seat is correctly
locked.
To tilt the seatback
Move the seat forwards if necessary.
Lift handle 2 and tilt the seatback to the
desired position.
Release the handle 2 and ensure that
the seatback is fully locked into posi-
tion.
REAR SEATS (1/6)
2
When moving the rear
seats, ensure that nothing
obstructs the anchorage
points (passenger’s arm or
leg, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).
3
To fold down the seatback
(flat-floor position)
Lower the headrest 3 and lift the
handle 2 to fold down the seat. Make
sure the seat is correctly locked in po-
sition.
Note: before folding down the seat-
back, check that no device is plugged
into the sockets 4.
1
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
To raise the seatback
Be sure to position the seat belt cor-
rectly, hold the seatback, lift and ensure
that it is correctly locked.
4
3.40
REAR SEATS (2/6)
To unfold a seat in the third
row
– Access the third row seats;
– place seat belt in hook 6 to avoid
damaging it;
– Pull the strap 7 to lift the seatback.
Check that the bonnet is correctly
locked.
To access the third row rear
seats
– Lift the handle 5;
– Hold the seatback and lower it at the
front until it locks;
– sit in the third row rear seat;
– hold the second row seatback and
fold it down;
– Make sure the seat is correctly
locked in position.
5
6
When moving the rear
seats:
– check that no one is near
to any of the moving parts;
– check that there is sufficient
space around the seat;
– check that nothing is obstructing
the section of the boot reserved
for storing the seat;
For safety reasons, carry out any
adjustments when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Before moving a second row seat forwards, ensure that the seat is not in the flat-
floor position.
7
When refitting the seat-
back, make sure it is cor-
rectly locked in place.
If seat covers are fitted,
make sure these do not prevent the
seatback latch from locking in.
Make sure that the seat belts are
positioned correctly.
Reposition the headrests.
3.41
REAR SEATS (3/6)
To fold down a third row seat
manually
– From the luggage compartment,
lower the headrest;
– pull strap 10. Depending on the vehi-
cle, it is located above or below the
false floor 11.
10
To get out of the third row
rear seats
– Lift the lever 8;
– guide the seat forwards until it locks.
11
Note: If the lever 8 does not work, pull
the emergency exit strap 9.
Using the emergency exit
strap 9 causes the second
row rear seats to move
backwards. During the op-
eration, ensure that nothing is ob-
structing the movement of the seat
(body parts, pets, toys etc.).
For safety reasons, carry out any
adjustments when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Risk of injury.
9
8
3.42
REAR SEATS (4/6)
To automatically fold down
the seats (flat position)
The rear seats are electrically unlocked
to fold down in order to create a flat
floor.
There are two ways to manoeuvre the
seats:
– from the boot using control 12;
– on the multifunction screen 13.
Disabling the function
– With the engine running, a buckled
seat belt prevents the movement of
the relevant seat.
– Once the vehicle is moving the two
controls are deactivated.
To raise the seats manually
Raise each seat as described on the
previous pages.
13
Conditions of use
With the vehicle at a standstill and the
rear seat belts unlocked:
– from control 12, with the boot lid
open;
– from the multifunction screen 13,
with the engine running.
Note: Before performing any unlock-
ing operations to fold down the seats,
the trays on the back of the front seats
must be folded away.
12
When moving the rear
seats:
– check that no one is near
to any of the moving parts;
– check that there is sufficient
space around the seat;
– check that nothing is obstructing
the section of the boot reserved
for storing the seat;
For safety reasons, carry out any
adjustments when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
3.43
REAR SEATS (5/6)
From the multifunction screen 13
With the vehicle at a standstill, select
menu “Vehicle”, “Seats” then “One-
touch folding”.
Press on the seat you wish to fold away,
or on all seats, then confirm.
Encountering an obstacle
While being moved, if a seat encoun-
ters an obstacle, the movement stops
of its own accord. You will then have
to manually fold back the seat after re-
moving the obstacle.
Operating fault
If all user conditions have been ful-
filled and the folding action still fails to
operate, please contact an authorised
dealer.
When moving the rear
seats, ensure that nothing
obstructs the anchorage
points (passenger’s arm or
leg, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).
A
B
D
E
C
Using control 12
Depending on the vehicle, folding
switches:
A the rear left seatback in the second
row.
B the rear centre and right-hand seat-
backs in the second row.
C the rear right seatback in the third
row.
D the rear left seatback in the third row.
E all seats.
13
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
12
3.44
Use restriction
It is not permitted to drive with a second
row rear seatback or seat folded down
when there is a passenger occupying a
third row rear seat.
REAR SEATS (6/6)
14
Special feature
For vehicles fitted with the “Hybrid
Assist" system: if it is present, take
care not to obstruct the vent 14 (refer
to the information on the “Hybrid Assist
System" in Section 2).
3.45
TAILGATE
2
Manual controls
To open
Press button 1 and lift the tailgate.
To close
Lower the boot lid using the handle
inside the boot 2 to assist you.
Opening the doors manually
from the inside
If it is impossible to unlock the tailgate,
it can be done manually from inside:
– access the luggage compartment by
folding forward the seatback(s) of
the rear bench seat;
– insert a pencil or similar object in
recess 3 and slide the unit as shown
in the illustration;
– push the tailgate to open it.
The attaching of any carry-
ing device (bike rack, lug-
gage box, etc.) resting on
the luggage compartment
lid is prohibited. To install a carrying
device on your vehicle, contact an
Approved Dealer.
1
3
3.46
Removal
– Unhook the two cords 1.
– Lift the parcel shelf 2 upwards, then
pull it towards you.
To refit it, proceed in reverse order to
removal.
REAR PARCEL SHELF
1
Do not place any heavy or
solid objects on the parcel
shelf.
These may pose a risk to
the vehicle occupants if the driver
has to brake suddenly or if the vehi-
cle is involved in an accident.
2
2
3.47
Removing the luggage cover
Slide the button 2 (movement B) and
lift the right-hand side of the roller at the
same time (movement C).
Then lift the left-hand side of the roller
and remove it.
To refit the luggage cover, carry out this
procedure in reverse.
To remove the flexible
section of the luggage cover
Pull handle 1 gently to release the pins
from their mounting points located on
each side of the boot.
Guide the luggage cover 2 onto the
roller (movement A).
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT COVER
Do not place any heavy or
solid objects on the luggage
cover. These may pose a
risk to the vehicle occu-
pants if the driver has to brake sud-
denly or if the vehicle is involved in
an accident.
1
Luggage compartment cover
storage
Lift up the rear of luggage compartment
carpet 4
Remove cover 3 from the side storage
compartment then tilt cover 5
Pivot the luggage cover so that the
handle 1 is visible and towards the front
of the vehicle.
Store the luggage cover with the
handle 1 forwards, inserting it one side
at a time;
Reposition the cover 5 and the flap 3.
2
B
A
3
1
C
4
5
3.48
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FITTINGS AND STORAGE (1/2)
Mobile floor 1
Depending on the vehicle, the mobile
floor is reversible.
Flat position
It allows you to have a flat floor by fold-
ing down the backs of the rear bench
seats and to compartmentalise the boot
into two distinct spaces.
The mobile floor is positioned on the
runners (2 and 3).
Maximum load allowed on the
mobile floor: 120 kg, evenly distrib-
uted.
Storage position
This allows for more space to store
things in the boot.
– Remove the mobile floor 1;
– place it in the boot under the runners
(2 and 3).
3
Intermediate position
(depending on vehicle)
In the blocked position, it allows you to
access the tools stored under the boot
carpet.
– Remove the mobile floor 1 by moving
it back (movement A) and pivoting it
upwards (movement B);
– place it in the boot, letting it be
guided by the runners (2 and 3).
1
2
A
B
1
1
3.49
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FITTINGS AND STORAGE (2/2)
Hook 4
You can use this to secure a bag.
Anchorage points
Attachment points 5.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
anchorage points, you can get them
from an authorised dealer.
4
Always position objects being trans-
ported so that the heaviest items
are resting against the back of the
rear seat.
Side storage compartment 6
Depending on the vehicle, this may be
used to hold the tyre inflation kit.
Please refer to “Tyre inflation kit” in
Section 5.
Special feature
For vehicles fitted with the “Hybrid
Assist” system: if it is present, take care
not to obstruct the vent 7 (refer to the in-
formation on the “Hybrid Assist system”
in Section 2).
6
7
5
5
3.50
Always place the objects to be trans-
ported so that their largest side rests
against the back of the rear seat for
normal loads (e.g.: A), or against the
back of the front seats B when the rear
seatbacks are folded down.
If you have to place objects on the
folded seat back, it is vital that you
remove the headrests before folding
the seat back so that it can be folded as
flat as possible against the seat.
TRANSPORTING OBJECTS IN THE BOOT
A
Always position the heavi-
est items directly on the
floor. Use the lashing points
on the floor of the luggage
compartment, if these are fitted to
the vehicle. The luggage should be
loaded in such a way that no items
will be thrown forward and strike the
occupants if the driver has to brake
suddenly. Fasten the rear seat belts,
even if the seats are not occupied.
B
3.51
Permissible nose weight, maxi-
mum permissible towing weight,
braked and unbraked: refer to
the information on “Weights” in
Section 6.
Choice and fitting of towing
equipment
Maximum weight of towing equip-
ment: 38 kg
For fitting and conditions of use,
refer to the equipment’s fitting in-
structions.
Please keep these instructions with
the rest of the vehicle documenta-
tion.
TRANSPORTING OBJECTS towbar
A
A: 866 mm (short chassis).
A: 1,023 mm (long chassis).
If the towbar ball obscures the regis-
tration plate or the rear fog lights, it
should be removed when not in use.
In all cases, comply with local leg-
islation.
3.52
3
LUGGAGE NET (1/2)
– attach the two hooks 5 for the net
straps 3 to the anchoring points 4
– adjust the net strap 3 so that it is taut.
Fitting the luggage net
behind the front seats
Inside the vehicle on each side:
– lower cover 1 to gain access to the
anchoring points for the top part of
the luggage net;
– insert the top rod of net 2 into the an-
choring points;
Depending on the vehicle, this may be
used when transporting animals or lug-
gage to isolate them from the passen-
ger section.
It can be positioned:
– behind the rear seats A;
– behind the front seats B.
The luggage net is de-
signed to retain a maximum
weight of 10 kg.
Risk of injury.
Do not install the luggage
net in this position when a
passenger is occupying a
rear seat
A
B
1
2
5
4
3.53
LUGGAGE NET (2/2)
9
6
– attach the hook 10 of the luggage
strap to the anchor points 9 closest
to the position of the mobile floor
(please refer to the information in
“Passenger Compartment Storage,
boot storage”, section 3);
– adjust net strap 8 so that it is taut.
– adjust the position of the second row
seats: ensure that the seatbacks do
not touch the luggage net.
Fitting the luggage net
behind the rear seats
(behind the second row rear seats)
Inside the vehicle on each side:
– push the second row seats fully
forward;
– lift cover 6 to access the luggage net
upper mounting rail;
– insert upper rod 7 for the net into the
rail;
10
8
6
7
3.54
ROOF BARS
Access to the mounting
points
Open the doors to access the mount-
ing points 1.
For information on the range of
equipment adapted to your vehi-
cle, we advise you to consult an ap-
proved Dealer.
Refer to the fitting instructions for in-
formation on how to fit roof bars and
conditions of use.
Please keep these instructions with
the rest of the vehicle documenta-
tion.
Maximum permissible load on
roof rack: refer to the information
on “Weights” in Section 6.
1
1
User precautions
Handling the tailgate
Before operating the tailgate, check the
objects and/or accessories (bike rack,
roof box, etc.) fitted on the roof bars:
these must be correctly positioned and
secured, and must not prevent the tail-
gate from operating correctly.
The attaching of any carry-
ing device (bike rack, lug-
gage box, etc.) resting on
the luggage compartment
lid is prohibited. To install a carrying
device on your vehicle, contact an
Approved Dealer.
4.1
Section 4: Maintenance
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2
Engine oil level: general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4
Engine oil level: topping up/filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6
Levels: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
windscreen/headlight washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
12 volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10
Tyre pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Bodywork maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Interior trim maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
4.2
BONNET (1/2)
Unlocking the bonnet catch
To unlock, push tab 3 at the same time
as opening the bonnet.
Opening the bonnet
Lift the bonnet, guiding it up, and it
will rest in position with the help of two
struts 2.
To open, pull handle 1, located on the
left-hand side of the dashboard.
The engine may be hot
when carrying out opera-
tions in close proximity. In
addition, the engine cooling
fan can come on at any moment.
Risk of injury.
1
Do not press down on the
bonnet: there is a risk that
the bonnet may accidentally
close.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in the park position.
Risk of injury.
2
3
4.3
BONNET (2/2)
Closing the bonnet
Check that nothing has been left in the
engine compartment.
To close the bonnet again, hold the
bonnet in the middle and lower it to
30 cm above the closed position, then
release it. It will latch automatically
under its own weight.
Ensure that the bonnet is
properly locked.
Check that nothing is pre-
venting the catch from lock-
ing (gravel, cloth, etc.).
After carrying out any work
in the engine compart-
ment, check that nothing
has been left behind (cloth,
tools, etc.).
These may damage the engine or
cause a fire.
In the event of even a slight
impact involving the radia-
tor grille or bonnet, have the
bonnet lock checked by an
authorised dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
4.4
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information
It is normal for an engine to use oil for
lubrication and cooling of moving parts
and it is normal to top up the level be-
tween oil changes.
However, contact your approved
Dealer if more than 0.5 litres is being
consumed every 600 miles (1,000 km)
after the running in period.
Oil change frequency: check the oil
level from time to time and certainly
before any long journey to avoid the
risk of damaging your engine.
Reading the oil level
The oil level should be read with the ve-
hicle on level ground, after the engine
has been switched off for some time.
The dipstick must be used to read
the exact oil level and make sure
that the maximum level has not been
exceeded (risk of engine damage).
Refer to the following pages.
The instrument panel display only
alerts the driver when the oil level is at
its minimum.
– Remove the dipstick and wipe with a
clean, lint-free cloth;
– push the dipstick in as far as it will
go (for vehicles equipped with a cap-
type dipstick C, screw the cap in as
far as it will go);
– take out the dipstick again;
– read the level: it should never fall
below minimum mark A or exceed
maximum mark B.
Once the operation has been com-
pleted, ensure that the dipstick is
pushed in as far as it will go or that
the “cap-type dipstick” is completely
screwed in.
C
A
B
A
B
In order to prevent splashing, it is
recommended that a funnel be used
when topping up/filling the oil.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
Exceeding the maximum
engine oil level
Under no circumstances
must the maximum fill
level B be exceeded: risk of damage
to the engine and catalytic con-
verter.
If the level exceeds the maximum
level, do not start your vehicle and
contact an authorised dealer.
4.5
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (1/2)
Topping up/Filling
The vehicle must be parked on level
ground and the engine should be cold
(for instance, before the engine is
started up for the first time in the day).
– Unscrew cap 1;
– top up the level (as a guide, the ca-
pacity between the “MINI” and the
“MAXI” reading on the dipstick 2
is between 0.33 and 0.44 gallons
(1.5 and 2 litres) depending on the
engine);
– wait for approximately 20 minutes to
allow the oil to flow into the engine;
– check the level using the dipstick 2
(as described above).
Once the operation has been com-
pleted, ensure that the dipstick is
pushed in as far as it will go or that
the “cap-type dipstick” is completely
screwed in.
Do not exceed the “MAXI” level and
do not forget to refit the cap 1 and
the dipstick 2.
1
2
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
In order to prevent splashing, it is
recommended that a funnel be used
when topping up/filling the oil.
1
2
1
2
4.6
Engine oil grade
Refer to the Maintenance Service
Booklet for your vehicle.
Never run the engine in an
enclosed space as exhaust
gases are poisonous.
Engine oil change: if you
are changing the oil when
the engine is hot, be careful
not to scald yourself if the
oil overflows.
Filling: take care when
topping up the oil that
no oil drips onto engine
components - risk of fire.
Remember to refit the cap securely
as there is a risk of fire if oil splashes
onto hot engine components.
Consult your approved Dealer at
once if you notice an abnormal or
repeated drop in any of the fluid
levels.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (2/2)/OIL CHANGE
Exceeding the maximum
engine oil level
Under no circumstances
must the maximum fill level
be exceeded: risk of damage to the
engine and catalytic converter.
If the oil level exceeds the maximum
level, do not start your vehicle and
contact an approved Dealer.
Oil change
Service interval: refer to the
Maintenance Service Booklet for your
vehicle.
Oil change capacity
Please refer to the maintenance docu-
ment for your vehicle, or contact an au-
thorised dealer.
Always check the engine oil level using
the dipstick, as explained previously (it
should never fall below the minimum
level, or be over the maximum level on
the dipstick).
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in the park position.
Risk of injury.
The engine may be hot
when carrying out opera-
tions in close proximity. In
addition, the engine cooling
fan can come on at any moment.
Risk of injury.
4.7
Replacement intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Document for
your vehicle.
Checking intervals
Check the coolant level regularly
(very severe damage is likely to be
caused to the engine if it runs out of
coolant).
If the level needs to be topped up, only
use products approved by our Technical
Department which ensure:
– protection against freezing;
– anticorrosion protection of the cool-
ing system.
LEVELS (1/3)
Coolant
With the engine switched off and on
level ground, the level when cold must
be between the “MINI" and "MAXI"
marks on coolant reservoir 1.
Top this level up when cold before it
reaches the MIN mark.
No operations should be
carried out on the cooling
circuit when the engine is
hot.
Risk of burns.
Consult your approved dealer at
once if you notice an abnormal or
repeated drop in any of the fluid
levels.
The engine may be hot
when carrying out opera-
tions in close proximity. In
addition, the engine cooling
fan can come on at any moment.
Risk of injury.
1
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
4.8
LEVELS (2/3)
Brake fluid level
This should be checked frequently, and
any time you notice even the slightest
loss in braking efficiency.
The level should be read with the engine
switched off and on level ground.
Level 2
It is normal for the level to drop as
the linings become worn, but it should
never drop below the “MINI” warning
line.
If you wish to check the disc and drum
wear yourself, you should obtain the
document explaining the checking pro-
cedure from our network or from the
manufacturer’s website.
Topping up
After any operation on the hydraulic cir-
cuit, a specialist must replace the fluid.
Only use fluids approved by our
Technical Department (and taken from
a sealed container).
Replacement intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Document for
your vehicle.
The engine may be hot
when carrying out opera-
tions in close proximity. In
addition, the engine cooling
fan can come on at any moment.
Risk of injury.
2
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
4.9
LEVELS (3/3)/FILTERS
Windscreen/headlight washer
reservoir
Topping up
With the engine switched off, open
cap 3, fill until you can see the fluid,
then refit the cap.
Note: Regularly check the reservoir
level by topping up the liquid before
taking a trip.
Liquid
Windscreen washer fluid. In winter, use
anti-freeze product. Use products rec-
ommended by an authorised dealer.
Note: do not use pure water (risk of
damage to the priming pump, limescale
building up on the pump and the jets).
Jets
To adjust the height of the windscreen
washer jets, please consult an autho-
rised dealer.
Depending on the vehicle, to find
out the fluid level, open cap 3 and
pull out the dipstick.
Filters
The replacement of filter elements (air
filter, passenger compartment filter,
diesel filter, etc.) is scheduled in the
maintenance operations for your vehi-
cle.
Replacement intervals for filter el-
ements: refer to the Maintenance
Document for your vehicle.
3
4.10
12 VOLT BATTERY (1/2)
1
Battery 1 does not require any mainte-
nance. You should not open it or add
any fluid.
Handle the battery with care
as it contains sulphuric acid
which must not come into
contact with the eyes or
skin. If it does, wash the affected
area with plenty of cold water. If
necessary, consult a doctor.
Ensure that naked flames, red hot
objects and sparks do not come into
contact with the battery as there is a
risk of explosion.
Depending on the vehicle, a system
continuously checks the battery charge
status. If this decreases, the message
“Battery low start engine” is displayed
on the instrument panel. In this case,
start the engine and the message on
the instrument panel will disappear.
The charge status of your battery can
decrease especially if you use your ve-
hicle:
– for short journeys;
– for driving in town;
– when the temperature drops;
– after extended use of energy-con-
suming devices (radio, etc.) with the
engine switched off.
The engine may be hot
during operations in close
proximity. In addition, the
engine cooling fan may
start at any moment.
Risk of injury.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
4.11
Replacing the battery
As this operation is complex, we advise
you to contact an approved Dealer.
12 VOLT BATTERY (2/2)
The battery is a specific
type, please ensure it is
replaced with the same
type. Consult an approved
dealer.
A
2 3 4
567
Label A
Observe the indications on the battery:
– 2 Naked flames and smoking are for-
bidden;
– 3 eye protection required;
– 4 keep away from children;
– 5 explosive materials;
– 6 refer to the handbook;
– 7 corrosive materials.
4.12
TYRE PRESSURE (1/2)
A
Label A
Open the door to read it.
Tyre pressures should be checked
when the tyres are cold.
If the tyre pressures cannot be checked
when the tyres are cold, increase the
pressures from 0.2 to 0.3 bar (or 3 PSI).
Never deflate a hot tyre.
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure
monitoring system
If under-inflated (puncture etc.), the
warning light lights up on the in-
strument panel; please refer to the in-
formation on the “Tyre pressure moni-
toring system” in Section 2.
B: size of the tyres fitted to the vehicle.
C: intended driving speed.
D: recommended pressure for optimis-
ing fuel consumption.
NB: driving comfort may be altered.
E: front tyre pressures.
F: rear tyre pressures.
G: tyre pressure for the emergency
spare wheel.
A
C
D
FE
G
B
C
E
E
F
F
Vehicle used fully laden
(Maximum Permissible
All-up Weight) and
towing a trailer
The maximum speed must be lim-
ited to 60 mph (100 km/h) and the
tyre pressure increased by 0.2 bar.
Refer to the information on “Weights”
in Section 6.
Risk of tyre blowouts.
4.13
TYRE PRESSURES (2/2)
Tyre safety and use of snow chains:
Refer to the information on “Tyres” in
Section 5 for the servicing conditions
and, depending on the version, the use
of chains.
For your safety, please re-
spect the speed limit.
When they need to be re-
placed, only tyres of the
same make, size, type and profile
should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load ca-
pacity and speed rating at least
equal to those of the original
tyres, or conform to those recom-
mended by an authorised dealer.
Failure to heed these instructions
could endanger your safety and
affect your vehicle’s roadworthi-
ness.
Risk of loss of control of the ve-
hicle.
4.14
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (1/2)
You should
Wash your car frequently, with the
engine off, with cleaning products rec-
ommended by the manufacturer (never
use abrasive products). Rinse thor-
oughly beforehand with a jet:
– spots of tree resin and industrial
grime;
– mud in the wheel arches and under-
neath the body which forms damp
patches;
– bird droppings, which cause a
chemical reaction with the paint that
rapidly discolours paintwork and
may even cause the paint to peel
off;
wash the vehicle immediately to
remove these marks since it is im-
possible to remove them by polish-
ing;
– salt, particularly in the wheel arches
and underneath the body after driv-
ing in areas where the roads have
been gritted.
Remove any plant matter (resin, leaves,
etc.) from the vehicle regularly.
What you should not do
Do not degrease or clean mechani-
cal components (e.g. the engine com-
partment), underneath the body, parts
with hinges (e.g. inside the doors) and
painted plastic external fittings (e.g.
bumpers) using high-pressure clean-
ing equipment or by spraying on prod-
ucts not approved by our Technical
Department. Doing this could give rise
to corrosion or operational faults.
Wash the vehicle in bright sunlight or
freezing temperatures.
Do not scrape off mud or dirt without
pre-wetting.
Allow dirt to accumulate on the exterior.
Allow rust to form following minor im-
pacts.
Do not use solvents not approved by
our Technical Department to remove
stains as this could damage the paint-
work.
Do not drive in snow or muddy condi-
tions without washing the vehicle, par-
ticularly under the wheel arches and
body.
A well-maintained vehicle will last
longer. It is therefore recommended to
maintain the exterior of the vehicle reg-
ularly.
Your vehicle has been treated with very
effective anti-corrosion products. It is
nevertheless subject to various outside
influences.
Corrosive agents in the atmosphere
– atmospheric pollution (built-up and
industrial areas),
– saline atmospheres (near the sea,
particularly in hot weather),
– seasonal and damp weather condi-
tions (e.g. road salt in winter, water
from road cleaners, etc.).
Minor impacts
Abrasive action
Dust and sand in the air, mud, road grit
thrown up by other vehicles, etc.
You should take a number of minor pre-
cautions in order to safeguard your ve-
hicle against such risks.
4.15
Respect local regulations about wash-
ing vehicles (e.g. do not wash your ve-
hicle on a public highway).
Observe the vehicle stopping distances
when driving on gravelled surfaces to
prevent paint damage.
Repair, or have repaired quickly, areas
where the paint has been damaged, to
prevent corrosion spreading.
Remember to visit the body shop pe-
riodically in order to maintain your
anti-corrosion warranty. Refer to the
Maintenance Document.
If it is necessary to clean mechani-
cal components, hinges, etc., spray
them with products approved by our
Technical Department to protect them
after they have been cleaned.
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (2/2)
We have selected special products
to care for your vehicle and you can
obtain these from the manufactur-
er’s accessory outlets.
Using a roller type car wash
Return the windscreen wiper stalk to
the Park position (refer to the informa-
tion on the “Windscreen washer, wiper”
in Section 1). Check the mounting of
external accessories, additional lights
and mirrors, and ensure that the wiper
blades are secured with adhesive tape.
Remove the radio aerial mast if your
vehicle is fitted with this equipment.
Remember to remove the tape and refit
the antenna after washing.
Cleaning the headlights
As the headlights are made of plastic
“glass”, use a soft cloth or cotton wool
to clean them. If this does not clean
them properly, moisten the cloth with
soapy water, then wipe clean with a soft
damp cloth or cotton wool.
Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry
cloth.
Cleaning products containing alco-
hol must not be used.
Vehicles with a matte paint
finish
This type of paint requires certain pre-
cautions.
Do not do the following
– use wax-based products (polishing);
– rub hard;
– wash the vehicle in a roller-type car
wash;
– wash the vehicle using a high-pres-
sure device;
– attach stickers to the paintwork (risk
of leaving marks).
You should do the following
Wash the vehicle by hand using plenty
of water, using a soft cloth or a gentle
sponge.
4.16
Glass instrument panel
(e.g.: instrument panel, clock, exterior
temperature display, radio display, mul-
timedia or multifunction display etc.)
Use a soft cloth (or cotton wool).
If this does not clean them properly,
use a soft cloth (or cotton wool) slightly
moistened with soapy water and then
wipe clean with another soft damp cloth
or cotton wool.
Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry
cloth.
Do not use products containing alco-
hol and/or spray fluids on the area.
Seat belts
These must be kept clean.
Use products selected by our Technical
Department (Approved outlets) or
warm, soapy water and a sponge and
wipe with a dry cloth.
Detergents or dyes must not be used
under any circumstances.
INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (1/2)
Textiles (seats, door trim, etc)
Vacuum-clean the textiles regularly.
Liquid stain
Use soapy water.
Dab lightly (never rub) with a soft cloth,
rinse and remove the excess.
Solid or pasty stain
Carefully remove the excess solid or
pasty material immediately with a
spatula (working from the edges to the
centre to avoid spreading the stain).
Clean as for a liquid stain.
Special instructions for sweets or
chewing gum
Put an ice cube on the stain to solidify
it, then proceed as for a solid stain.
A well-maintained vehicle will last
longer. It is therefore recommended to
maintain the interior of the vehicle regu-
larly.
A stain should always be dealt with
swiftly.
Whatever type of stain is on the trim,
use cold (or warm) soapy water with
natural soap.
Detergents (washing-up liquid, pow-
dered products, alcohol-based prod-
ucts) should not be used.
Use a soft cloth.
Rinse and soak up the excess.
For further recommendations for
maintaining the interior, and/or for
any unsatisfactory results, please
see an authorised dealer.
4.17
You are strongly recom-
mended not to use high-
pressure or spray cleaning
equipment inside the pas-
senger compartment: use of such
equipment could impair the correct
functioning of the electrical or elec-
tronic components in the vehicle, or
have other detrimental effects.
INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (2/2)
You should not:
You are strongly advised not to po-
sition objects such as deodorants,
scents, etc. near air vents, as this could
damage your dashboard trim.
Removal/replacing removable
equipment originally fitted in
the vehicle
If you need to remove equipment in
order to clean the passenger com-
partment (for example, mats), always
ensure that they are correctly refitted
and are the right way around (the driv-
er’s mat should be fitted on the driver’s
side, etc.) and fit them with the compo-
nents supplied with the equipment (for
example, the driver mat should always
be fixed using the pre-fitted mounting
components).
With the vehicle stationary, always
ensure that nothing will impede driving
(anything obstructing the pedals, heel
wedged by the mat etc.).
4.18
5.1
Section 5: Practical advice
Puncture/emergency spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2
Tyre inflation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12
Tyres (tyre and wheel safety, use in winter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14
Headlights (changing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17
Rear lights (changing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19
Indicator lights (changing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23
interior lighting:<UD-sous-titre> changing bulbs</UD-sous-titre> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27
Battery: troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.29
RENAULT card: battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.31
Radio frequency remote control: batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33
Wipers (replacing blades) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34
Towing: breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.36
Tow eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.37
Operating faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.38
5.2
In case of puncture
Depending on the vehicle, a tyre infla-
tion kit or emergency spare wheel is
provided (refer to the following pages).
Special note
The Tyre Pressure Monitor function
does not check the emergency spare
wheel (the wheel replaced by the emer-
gency spare wheel disappears from the
instrument panel display).
Refer to the information on the “Tyre
pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
If the emergency spare wheel has been stored for several years, have it
checked by your Dealer to ensure that it is safe to use.
Vehicles fitted with an emergency spare wheel smaller than the
four other wheels:
– Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel to the same vehicle.
– Replace the emergency spare wheel as soon as possible with a wheel with the
same dimensions as the original.
– When this is fitted to the vehicle, which must only be a temporary measure, the
driving speed must not exceed the speed indicated on the label on the wheel.
– Fitting an emergency spare wheel may alter the way the vehicle usually runs.
Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration and reduce your speed when cor-
nering.
– If you need to use snow chains, fit the emergency spare wheel to the rear axle
and check the tyre pressure.
PUNCTURE/EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (1/3)
If the vehicle is parked on
the hard shoulder, you must
warn other road users of
your vehicle’s presence
with a warning triangle or with other
devices as per the legislation apply-
ing to the country you are in.
5.3
PUNCTURE/EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (2/3)
Emergency spare wheel A
This is located in the luggage compart-
ment:
– open the tailgate;
– lift the carpet 1;
– unscrew central mounting 2;
– for vehicles which are fitted with it,
disconnect the connector 3 located
under the luggage compartment
carpet then remove the audio ampli-
fier. Do not plug in the audio amplifier
again without the emergency spare
wheel;
– remove the emergency spare wheel;
– store the punctured wheel in the
storage bag (refer to the information
on “Tools” in section 5) and place it in
the luggage compartment.
2
A
6
7
B
3
Emergency spare wheel C
It is located under the vehicle.
From the boot:
– for vehicles fitted with a servo 5, un-
screw the three mounting bolts 4
then move the servo to access the
cover 7;
– lift cover 7;
– remove blanking cover;
– only use the wheel brace 6 (using
a different tool could damage the
mechanism) to unroll the retaining
cable (movement B), and the wheel
falls to the ground.
4
5
5
1
5.4
8
C
From the exterior of the vehicle, stand
the wheel up, pass the cable and the
component 8 through the wheel rim and
release the wheel.
To put the spare wheel back C
To carry out this operation, the cable
must be unwound.
Stand the wheel up with the valve to-
wards you. Thread the cable and the
component 8 through the wheel rim. Lie
the wheel down with the valve towards
the ground.
PUNCTURE/EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (3/3)
Reposition the blanking cover then the
cover 7.
For vehicles fitted with a servo, replace
the servo 5. Tighten the three screws 4.
5
7
From the luggage compartment, tighten
the bolt fully in order to wind the retain-
ing cable, ensuring that the wheel re-
mains horizontal and the cable taut.
As the punctured wheel is wider than the emergency spare wheel, when
you place the punctured wheel in the emergency spare wheel bay, the
vehicle’s ground clearance is reduced. To prevent damage, proceed ca-
refully when driving over raised sections of road and when dismounting
pavements When this is fitted to the vehicle, which must only be a temporary
measure, the driving speed must not exceed the speed indicated on the label
on the wheel. Replace the emergency spare wheel as soon as possible with a
wheel with the same dimensions as the original.
4
5
5.5
TYRE INFLATION KIT (1/4)
The kit is only approved for
inflating the tyres of the ve-
hicle originally equipped
with the kit.
It must never be used to inflate
the tyres of another vehicle, or any
other inflatable object (rubber ring,
rubber boat, etc.).
Avoid spillage on skin when hand-
ling the repair liquid bottle. If drop-
lets do leak out, rinse them off with
plenty of water.
Keep the repair kit away from chil-
dren.
Do not dispose of the empty bottle
in the countryside. Return it to your
approved dealer or to a recycling or-
ganisation.
The bottle has a limited service
life which is indicated on its label.
Check the expiry date.
Contact an approved dealer to re-
place the inflation tube and repair
product bottle.
A
B
The kit repairs tyres when
tread A has been dam-
aged by objects smaller
than 4 mm. It cannot repair
all types of puncture, such as cuts
larger than 4 mm, or cuts in tyre
sidewall B.
Ensure also that the wheel rim is in
good condition.
Do not pull out the foreign body
causing the puncture if it is still in
the tyre.
Do not attempt to use the
inflation kit if the tyre has
been damaged as a result
of driving with a puncture.
You should therefore carefully check
the condition of the tyre sidewalls
before any operation.
Driving with underinflated, flat or
punctured tyres can be dangerous
and may make the tyre impossible
to repair.
This repair is temporary.
A tyre which has been punctured
should always be inspected (and re-
paired, where possible) as soon as
possible by a specialist.
When taking a tyre which has been
repaired using this kit to be replaced,
you must inform the specialist.
When driving, vibration may be felt
due to the presence of the repair
product injected into the tyre.
5.6
TYRE INFLATION KIT (2/4)
Depending on the vehicle, in the event
of a puncture, use the kit located in
storage compartment C or underneath
luggage compartment carpet D.
Before using the kit, park
the vehicle at a sufficient
distance from traffic, switch
on the hazard warning
lights, apply the parking brake, ask
all passengers to leave the vehicle
and keep them away from traffic.
If the vehicle is parked on
the hard shoulder, you must
warn other road users of
your vehicle’s presence
with a warning triangle or with other
devices as per the legislation apply-
ing to the country you are in.
C
D
With the engine running and the
parking brake applied,
– connect the compressor hose 3 to
the container’s inlet 8;
– remove the cap from the container
inflation adapter 2;
– unscrew the valve cap on the rel-
evant wheel and screw on the con-
tainer’s inflation end piece 2;
– disconnect any accessories previ-
ously connected to the vehicle’s ac-
cessories sockets;
– the end piece 6 must be plugged in
to the vehicle accessories socket;
4 52
8
– press the switch 4 to inflate the
tyre to the recommended pressure
(please refer to the information about
“Tyre Pressures” in Section 4);
– after a maximum of 15 minutes, stop
inflating and read the pressure (on
pressure gauge 5).
Note: while the bottle is emptying
(approximately 30 seconds), the
pressure gauge 5 will indicate briefly
a pressure of 6 bar, then the pres-
sure drops.
– Adjust the pressure: to increase
it, continue inflation with the kit; to
reduce it, press button 7.
6
3
7
5.7
If the recommended pressure of
1.8 bar cannot be achieved after
15 minutes, repair is impossible. Do
not drive the vehicle. Consult an au-
thorised dealer.
TYRE INFLATION KIT (3/4)
Nothing should be placed
around the driver’s feet
as such objects may slide
under the pedals during
sudden braking manoeuvres and
obstruct their use.
Once the tyre is correctly inflated,
remove the kit: slowly unscrew the in-
flation end piece of the container 2 to
prevent any product spatter and store
the container in plastic packaging to
prevent product leaks.
– Affix the driving recommendation
label (located under the container) to
the dashboard where the driver can
see it.
– Put the kit away.
– At the end of this initial inflation op-
eration, air will still escape from the
tyre. You must drive a short distance
in order to seal the hole.
2
– Start immediately and drive at a
speed of 12.4 to 37.2 mph (20 to
60 km/h) in order to distribute the
product evenly in the tyre; after driv-
ing a distance of 1.86 miles (3 km),
stop and check the pressure.
– If the pressure is higher than 1.3 bar
but lower than the recommended
pressure (refer to the label affixed to
the edge of the driver’s door), adjust
it. Otherwise, contact an approved
dealer: the tyre cannot be repaired.
5.8
Precautions when using the
kit
The kit should not be operated for more
than 15 consecutive minutes.
The container must be replaced after
the first use even if liquid remains
inside.
TYRE INFLATION KIT (4/4)
Following repair with the kit,
do not travel further than
120 miles (200 km). In addi-
tion, reduce your speed and
under no circumstances exceed
48 mph (80 km/h). The sticker,
which you must affix in a prominent
position on the dashboard, reminds
you of this.
Depending on the country or local
legislation, a tyre repaired with the
inflation kit may need to be replaced.
Please be aware that a
poorly tightened or miss-
ing valve cap can make the
tyres less airtight and may
lead to pressure loss.
Always use valve caps identical to
those fitted originally and tighten
them fully.
5.9
TOOLS (1/2)
Do not leave the tools un-
secured inside the vehicle
as they may come loose
under braking. After use,
check that all the tools are correctly
clipped into the tool kit, then posi-
tion it correctly in its housing: risk of
injury.
If wheel bolts are supplied in the tool
kit, you must use these bolts, and
only these, for the emergency spare
wheel: refer to the label affixed to
the emergency spare wheel.
The jack is designed for wheel
changing purposes only. Under no
circumstances should it be used for
carrying out repairs underneath the
vehicle or to gain access to the un-
derside of the vehicle.
The presence of the tools depends on
the vehicle.
Jack 1
Fold it correctly before refitting it in its
housing (ensure that the wheelbrace is
correctly positioned 2).
Hubcap tool 3
This tool is used to remove the wheel
trims.
Screw guide 4
For tightening/loosening wheel bolts on
vehicles fitted with alloy wheels
Towing hitch 5
Refer to the information on “Towing” in
Section 5.
Wheelbrace 6
Locks or unlocks the wheel bolts and
tow eye 5.
Storage bag
This allows you to store a punctured
wheel in the boot.
1
6
3
5
2
4
5.10
TOOLS (2/2)
5-seater version
Lift the boot carpet and secure it with
the hook.
The tools are in the bag 7 held in place
by a strap.
7-seater version
Lift the third row rear right-hand seat,
pull back the strap 8 and take out the
bag containing the tools.
To put it back, fold the jack fully, then
store and replace the tool bag in its
housing. Check that the assembly is
correctly positioned (to avoid noise).
8
7
After use, reposition the bag 7
against the partition and pull the
end of the strap towards the vehi-
cle interior.
5.11
WHEEL TRIM
Wheel trim
Remove it using the hubcap tool 3 by
connecting the hook in the recess pro-
vided next to the valve 1 (to attach the
metal clip).
Note: if you are using anti-theft bolts,
refer to the information on “Changing a
wheel”.
3
1
To refit it, align it with the valve 1 and
the wheel bolts 2. Push in the centre of
the wheel trim to clip the centre section
around the wheel bolts. Push in the re-
taining hooks located around the edge
of the trim. Firmly push in the centre of
the wheel trim again to ensure that the
central clips locate correctly above the
heads of the wheel bolts.
Note: if your vehicle is fitted with anti-
theft bolts, always fix them in place of
one of the wheel bolts 2.
2
5.12
CHANGING A WHEEL (1/2)
3
1
Offer up the jack 1 horizontally; the
jack head must be lined up with the
sill, closest to the wheel concerned, as
shown by arrow 2.
Start cranking the jack up by hand to
align the base plate (which should be
pushed slightly under the vehicle).
Turn the wheelbrace until the wheel lifts
off the ground.
Vehicles equipped with a jack
and wheelbrace
If necessary, remove the wheel trim.
Use the wheelbrace 3 to slacken off the
wheel bolts. Position it so as to be able
to push from above.
Switch on the hazard warn-
ing lights.
Keep the vehicle away from
traffic and on a level surface
where it will not slip.
Apply the parking brake and engage
a gear (first or reverse, or P for auto-
matic transmissions).
Ask all the passengers to leave the
vehicle and keep them away from
traffic.
If the vehicle is parked on
the hard shoulder, you must
warn other road users of
your vehicle’s presence
with a warning triangle or with other
devices as per the legislation apply-
ing to the country you are in.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a
jack or wheelbrace, you can obtain
these from your authorised dealer.
2
5.13
CHANGING A WHEEL (2/2)
Undo the bolts and take off the wheel.
Fit the emergency spare wheel onto
the hub and rotate it until the mounting
holes in the wheel coincide with those
of the hub.
Tighten the bolts, checking that the
wheel is correctly positioned on its hub
and unscrew the jack.
With the wheel on the ground, tighten
the bolts fully and have the tightness of
the bolts checked and the emergency
spare wheel pressure checked as soon
as possible.
Anti-theft bolt
If you use anti-theft bolts, fit these
nearest the valve (wheel embel-
lisher may not be able to fit).
If you have a puncture, re-
place the wheel as soon as
possible.
A tyre which has been punc-
tured should always be inspected
(and repaired, where possible) by a
specialist.
5.14
TYRES (1/3)
Maintaining the tyres
The tyres must be in good condition
and the tread form must have sufficient
depth; tyres approved by our Technical
Department have tread wear indica-
tors 1 which are indicators moulded
into the tread at several points.
The tyres are the only contact between
the vehicle and the road, so it is essen-
tial to keep them in good condition.
You must make sure that your tyres
conform to local road traffic regulations.
When the tread has worn down to the
wear warning strips, these strips will
become visible 2: it is then necessary
to replace your tyres because the tread
rubber is now only 1.6 mm deep at
most, resulting in poor road holding
on wet roads.
An overloaded vehicle, long journeys
by motorway, particularly in very hot
weather, or continual driving on poorly
surfaced minor roads will lead to more
rapid tyre wear and affect safety.
Incidents which occur when
driving, such as striking the
kerb, may damage the tyres
and wheel rims, and could
also lead to misalignment of the
front or rear axle geometry. In this
case, have the condition of these
checked by an approved dealer.
2
1
For your safety, please re-
spect the speed limit.
When they need to be re-
placed, only tyres of the
same make, size, type and profile
should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load ca-
pacity and a speed capacity at
least equal to the original tyres,
or correspond to those recom-
mended by your authorised
dealer.
Failure to heed these instructions
could endanger your safety and
affect your vehicle’s roadworthi-
ness.
Risk of loss of control of the ve-
hicle.
5.15
TYRES (2/3)
Tyre pressures
Adhere to the tyre pressures (including
the emergency spare wheel). The tyre
pressures should be checked at least
once a month and additionally before
any long journey (refer to the label af-
fixed to the edge of the driver’s door).
The pressures should be checked cold:
ignore higher pressures which may be
reached in hot weather or following a
high speed journey.
If the tyre pressures cannot be checked
when the tyres are cold, increase the
pressures from 0.2 to 0.3 bar (or 3 PSI).
Never deflate a hot tyre.
Special note
Depending on the vehicle, there may
be an adapter which needs to be posi-
tioned on the valve before air is added.
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure
monitoring system
In cases of under-inflation (puncture,
low pressure, etc.), warning light
lights up on the instrument panel.
Please refer to the information on the
“Tyre pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
Emergency spare wheel
Refer to the information on “Puncture”
and “Changing a wheel” in Section 5.
Incorrect tyre pressures
lead to abnormal tyre wear
and unusually hot running.
These are factors which
may seriously affect safety and lead
to:
– poor road holding,
– risk of bursting or tread separa-
tion.
The pressure depends on the load
and the speed of use. Adjust the
pressure according to the condi-
tions of use (refer to the label affixed
to the edge of the driver’s door).
Please be aware that a
poorly tightened or miss-
ing valve cap can make the
tyres less airtight and lead
to pressure loss.
Always use valve caps identical to
those fitted originally and tighten
them fully.
5.16
TYRES (3/3)
For safety reasons, this op-
eration must be carried out
by a specialist.
Fitting different tyres may
change your vehicle as follows:
– it may mean that your vehicle no
longer conforms to current regu-
lations;
– it may change the way it handles
when cornering;
– it may cause the steering to be
heavy;
– It may affect the use of snow
chains.
Use in winter
Chains
For safety reasons, fitting snow
chains to the rear axle is strictly for-
bidden.
Chains cannot be fitted to tyres which
are larger than those originally fitted to
the vehicle.
Snow or Winter tyres
We would recommend that these be
fitted to all four wheels to ensure that
your vehicle retains maximum adhe-
sion.
Warning: These tyres sometimes have
a specific direction of rotation and a
maximum speed index which may be
lower than the maximum speed of your
vehicle.
Snow chains may only be
fitted to tyres of the same
size as those originally
fitted to your vehicle.
In all cases, we would recommend
that you contact an approved Dealer
who will be able to advise you on
the choice of equipment which is
most suitable for your vehicle.
Changing a wheel
As the tyre pressure moni-
tor may take several min-
utes to correctly determine
the positions of the wheels and the
pressure values after driving, check
the tyre pressures following any op-
eration.
Studded tyres
This type of equipment may only be
used for a limited period and as laid
down by local legislation. It is neces-
sary to observe the speed specified by
current legislation.
These tyres must, at a minimum, be
fitted to the two front wheels.
Fitting new tyres
5.17
HEADLIGHTS: changing bulbs (1/2)
Direction indicator lights
Turn bulb holder 1 a quarter of a turn
and take out the bulb.
Bulb type: PY21W.
Once the bulb has been replaced,
check that it is properly secured.
1
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
B
A
Halogen dipped beam
headlight
To change the bulb:
– remove cover A;
– turn the bulb holder a quarter turn 2;
– remove the bulb.
Bulb type: H7.
2
3
Halogen main beam headlight
To change the bulb:
– remove cover B;
– turn the bulb holder a quarter turn 3;
– remove the bulb.
Bulb type: H7.
It is essential to use anti-U.V. 55W
bulbs so as not to damage the plastic
on the headlights.
Do not touch the bulb glass. Hold it
by its base.
When the bulb has been changed,
make sure you refit the cover correctly.
5.18
Front fog lights6
– Access the bulb holder via the un-
derneath of the vehicle;
– unclip the flap;
– depending on the vehicle, discon-
nect the connector;
– turn the bulb holder a quarter turn.
Bulb type: H11 H16or depending on
the vehicle.
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (2/2)
To comply with local legislation, or
as a precaution, you can obtain an
emergency kit containing a set of
spare bulbs and fuses from an ap-
proved dealer.
Any operation on (or modi-
fication to) the electrical
system must be performed
by an approved dealer
since an incorrect connection might
damage the electrical equipment
(harness, components and in partic-
ular the alternator). In addition, your
Dealer has all the parts required for
fitting these units.
LED dipped beam/main beam
headlights 5
Please see an authorised dealer.
Daytime running lights and
side lights 4
Please see an authorised dealer.
6
Additional lights
If you wish to fit fog lights to your ve-
hicle, please see an authorised dealer.
4
5
The engine may be hot
when carrying out opera-
tions in close proximity. In
addition, the engine cooling
fan can come on at any moment.
Risk of injury.
5.19
REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (1/5)
Direction indicator lights/
brake and side lights
Short chassis version
Open the luggage compartment,
remove the cover 1 to access the
screw 2 and undo it.
Remove the rear lights unit.
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
Refitting
To refit, proceed in the reverse order,
taking care not to damage the wiring.
3
4
Unclip the bulb holder a quarter of a
turn.
Replace the bulb.
Direction indicator light 3
Bulb type: PY21W.
Brake light 4
Bulb type: P21W.
1
2
5.20
REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (2/5)
Direction indicator lights/
brake and side lights
(continued)
Long chassis version
Open the luggage compartment lid and
remove the bolts 5 using a tool.
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
Open the luggage compartment,
remove the cover 6 to access the
screw 7 and undo it.
Remove the rear lights unit.
Unclip the bulb holder a quarter of a
turn.
Replace the bulb.
8
9
Direction indicator light 8
Bulb type: PY21W.
Brake light 9
Bulb type: P21W.
Refitting
To refit, proceed in the reverse order,
taking care not to damage the wiring.
5
6
7
5.21
Reversing lights
From the luggage compartment, unclip
the cover 10 on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid.
10
REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (3/5)
Unclip the bulb holder 11 a quarter of
a turn.
Bulb type: W16W.
Refitting
To refit, proceed in the reverse order,
taking care not to damage the wiring.
11
5.22
Fog light 12
Unscrew the flap located under the
rear bumper using a flat-blade screw-
driver or similar. Access the bulb holder,
then unscrew it by turning towards the
centre of the vehicle.
Bulb type: P21W.
REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (4/5)
12
LED lighting
The lights are equipped with an LED
lighting system as soon as the side
lights are switched on.
Consult an approved Dealer to replace
the LEDs.
This lighting does not replace a faulty
side light.
13
High level brake light 13
Consult an approved Dealer.
5.23
REAR LIGHTS AND SIDE LIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (5/5)
Indicator lights 15
Consult an approved Dealer.
15
Number plate lights 14
Unclip the light 14 by sliding the light to
the right (movement A).
Remove the light cover to gain access
to the bulb.
Bulb type: festoon type bulb W5W.
14
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
A
5.24
INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (1/3)
Map reading lights 1
Please consult an authorised dealer.
1
1
Ambient lighting
Please consult an authorised dealer.
1
5.25
Centre console storage
compartment light 3
Unclip the light 3 by hand by pulling for-
wards then pull the bulb downwards.
Bulb type: W5W.
3
2
Footwell lights 2
Please consult an authorised dealer.
INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (2/3)
5.26
The bulbs are under pres-
sure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (3/3)
Boot lights 5
Using a flat-blade screwdriver or simi-
lar, unclip the light 5 by pressing the
tab located on one side of the light to
access the bulb.
Bulb type: W5W.
5
4
Glove box light 4
Using a flat-blade screwdriver or simi-
lar, unclip the light 4 by pressing the
tab located on one side of the light to
access the bulb.
Bulb type: W5W.
5.27
FUSES (1/2)
Fuse box
If any electrical component does not
work, check the condition of the fuses.
Open flap A. Press the bottom of clip 1
and pull simultaneously on flap A to
remove it and access the fuses.
Tweezers 2
Remove the fuse using tweezers 2, lo-
cated underneath the fuses.
To remove the fuse from the tweezers,
slide the fuse to the side.
It is not advisable to use the free fuse
locations.
Check the fuse in question
and replace it, if neces-
sary, by a fuse of the same
rating.
If a fuse is fitted where the rating is
too high, it may cause the electrical
circuit to overheat (risk of fire) in the
event of an item of equipment using
an excessive amount of current.
In accordance with local legislation
or as a precautionary measure:
obtain an emergency kit containing
a set of spare bulbs and fuses from
an approved Dealer.
2
Use the fuse allocation label in storage
compartment A to identify the fuses.
Certain fuses should only be replaced
by a qualified professional. These fuses
are not listed on the label.
Only change the fuses represented on
the label.
A
1
5.28
FUSES (2/2)
Allocation of fuses
(the presence of certain fuses depends on the vehicle equipment level)
Symbol Allocation Symbol Allocation
H
Windscreen washer
“Hybrid Assist” system
ë
Third row accessories socket, boot accessories
socket
Ý
Towbar socket
Æ
Front cigarette lighter, front and rear second row
accessories socket
Diagnostic socket, audio alarm
Not used
Ì
Horn
Heated door mirrors
Instrument panel, dashboard control lighting
×
Brake lights, passenger compartment central unit
Rear electric windows
Parking brake
f
Front windscreen wiper
Additional servo
D
Direction indicator lights, hazard warning lights
î
Radio, multifunction screen, multimedia acces-
sories sockets, parking brake control
Rear USB sockets on console
Passenger compartment centre unit, rear wiper,
rear fog light
O
Locking the doors and luggage compartment
5.29
12 VOLT BATTERY: troubleshooting (1/2)
To avoid all risk of sparks:
– Ensure that any consumers (cour-
tesy lights, etc.) are switched off
before disconnecting or reconnect-
ing the battery;
– when charging, stop the charger
before connecting or disconnecting
the battery;
– to avoid creating a short circuit be-
tween the terminals, do not place
metal objects on the battery;
– always wait at least one minute after
the engine has been switched off
before disconnecting a battery;
– make sure that you reconnect the
battery terminals after refitting.
Connecting a battery charger
The battery charger must be com-
patible with a battery with nominal
voltage of 12 volts.
Do not disconnect the battery when the
engine is running. Follow the instruc-
tions given by the manufacturer of
the battery charger you are using.
Special procedures may be
required to charge some
batteries. Contact your au-
thorised dealer.
Avoid all risk of sparks which may
cause an immediate explosion, and
charge the battery in a well venti-
lated area.
Risk of serious injury.
Handle the battery with care
as it contains sulphuric acid,
which must not come into
contact with eyes or skin. If
it does, wash the affected area with
plenty of cold water. If necessary,
consult a doctor.
Ensure that naked flames, red hot
objects and sparks do not come into
contact with the battery as there is a
risk of explosion. There is a risk of
explosion.
The engine may be hot when car-
rying out operations in close prox-
imity. In addition, the engine cooling
fan can come on at any moment.
Risk of injury.
Before performing any
action in the engine com-
partment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stop-
ping the engine” in Section 2).
5.30
Starting the vehicle using the
battery from another vehicle
If you have to use the battery from an-
other vehicle to start, obtain suitable
jump leads (with a large cross section)
from an approved dealer or, if you al-
ready have jump leads, ensure that
they are in perfect condition.
The two batteries must have an iden-
tical nominal voltage of 12 volts. The
battery supplying the current should
have a capacity (amp-hours, Ah) which
is at least the same as that of the dis-
charged battery.
Ensure that there is no risk of contact
between the two vehicles (risk of short
circuiting when the positive terminals
are connected) and that the discharged
battery is properly connected. Switch
off your vehicle ignition.
Start the engine of the vehicle supply-
ing the current and run it at a moderate
speed.
12 VOLT BATTERY: troubleshooting (2/2)
3
B
A
1
Lift the red cover on box 1 located
behind the battery.
Connect the positive cable A to sup-
port 3 (+) located under the box
cover 1, then to terminal 5 (+) of the
battery supplying the current.
Connect the negative cable B to the
terminal 4 ( – ) of the battery supply-
ing the current then to the metal cable 2
( – ) of the discharged battery.
Start the engine, and as soon as it starts
running, disconnect cables A and B in
reverse order ( 2 - 4 - 5 - 3).
2
5
4
2
Check that there is no con-
tact between leads A and B
and that the positive lead A
is not touching any metal
parts on the vehicle supplying the
current.
Risk of injury and/or damage to
the vehicle.
2
3
5.31
Operating faults
If the battery is too weak to ensure cor-
rect operation, you can still start and
lock/unlock the vehicle (please refer to
the information on “Locking/unlocking
the opening elements” in Section 1).
RENAULT CARD: battery
Replacing the battery
When the message “Keycard battery
low” appears on the instrument panel,
replace the battery in the RENAULT
card:
– slide the rear casing 1 downwards
while pressing on zone A;
– remove the battery cover 2;
– remove the battery by pressing on
one side and lifting the other;
– replace it according to the direc-
tion and template shown inside the
cover.
When refitting, proceed in the reverse
order, then press one of the buttons on
the card four times, close to the vehicle:
the message will disappear.
Note: it is not advisable to touch the
electronic circuit or contacts on the
RENAULT card when replacing the bat-
tery.
The batteries are available from ap-
proved Dealers, and their service
life approximately two years. Check
that there is no dye on the battery:
risk of an incorrect electrical con-
tact.
2
A
1
Do not throw away your used bat-
teries; give them to an organisation
responsible for collecting and recy-
cling batteries.
5.32
Operating faults
If the battery is too weak to ensure cor-
rect operation, you can still start and
lock/unlock the vehicle (please refer to
the information on “Locking/unlocking
the opening elements” in Section 1).
Replacing the battery
Open the case at slot 1 using a flat-
blade screwdriver or similar, and re-
place the battery 2, observing the po-
larity shown on the back of the cover.
Note: It is not advisable to touch the
electronic circuit in the key cover when
replacing the battery.
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: batteries
When refitting, ensure that the cover
is correctly clipped on and the screw
tightened.
The batteries are available from ap-
proved Dealers, and their service
life approximately two years.
Check that there is no dye on the
battery: risk of an incorrect electri-
cal contact.
2
1
1
Do not throw away your used bat-
teries; give them to an organisation
responsible for collecting and recy-
cling batteries.
5.33
ACCESSORIES
Electrical and electronic accessories
Before installing this type of accessory (particularly for transmitters/receivers: frequency bandwidth, power level, po-
sition of the aerial, etc.), make sure it is compatible with your vehicle. You can get advice from an authorised dealer.
Connect accessories with a maximum power of 120 Watts only. Fire hazard. When several accessory sockets are
used at the same time, the total power of the connected accessories must not exceed 180 watts.
No work may be carried out on the vehicle’s electrical or radio circuits, except by authorised dealers: an incorrectly connected
system may result in damage being caused to the electrical equipment and/or the components connected to it.
If the vehicle is fitted with any aftermarket electrical equipment, make sure that the installation is correctly protected by a fuse.
Establish the rating and position of this fuse.
Using the diagnostic socket
The use of electronic accessories on the diagnostic socket may cause serious disturbance to the vehicle’s electronic systems.
For your safety we recommend that you use only electronic accessories approved by the manufacturer, consult an Approved
Dealer. Serious accident risk.
Use of transmitting/receiving devices (telephones, CB equipment etc.).
Telephones and CB equipment with integrated aerials may cause interference to the electronic systems originally fitted to the
vehicle: it is advisable only to use equipment with an external aerial. Furthermore, we remind you of the need to conform
to the legislation in force concerning the use of such equipment.
Fitting aftermarket accessories
If you wish to install accessories on the vehicle: please contact an authorised dealer. Also, to ensure the correct operation of
your vehicle, and to avoid any risk to your safety, we recommend that you use only accessories specifically designed for your
vehicle, which are the only accessories for which the manufacturer will provide a warranty.
If you are using an anti-theft device, only attach it to the brake pedal.
Obstructions to the driver
On the driver’s side, only use mats suitable for the vehicle, attached with the pre-fitted components, and check the fitting regu-
larly. Do not lay one mat on top of another. There is a risk of wedging the pedals.
5.34
WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES: replacement (1/2)
Windscreen wiper blades 1
With the ignition on and the engine
switched off, lower the windscreen
wiper stalk fully: the blades stop slightly
away from the bonnet.
Lift wiper arm 3, press button 2 to re-
lease the blade.
Refitting
Slide the blade along the arm until
it clips on. Check that it is correctly
locked in place. Lower the windscreen
wiper arm carefully.
1
2
3
With the ignition on, return the wind-
screen wiper stalk to the stop position.
The blade on the driver’s side must
always be above the passenger blade.
If this is not the case, a quick sweep of
the windscreen wipers should be per-
formed once the vehicle is travelling at
over 4 mph (7 km/h).
Note: Before restarting your vehicle,
lower the windscreen wiper blades
onto the windscreen to avoid any risk
of damaging the bonnet or the wipers.
– In frosty weather, make
sure that the wiper blades
are not stuck by ice (to
avoid the risk of the motor
overheating or damaging the
blades).
– Check the condition of the wiper
blades.
Replace the wiper blades as soon
as they begin to lose efficiency
(approximately once a year).
Whilst changing the blade, take care
not to drop the arm onto the window
after it has been removed as this
may break the window.
5.35
WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES: replacement (2/2)
Check the condition of the wiper
blades.
– clean the blades, windscreen and
rear screen regularly with soapy
water;
– do not use them when the wind-
screen or rear screen are dry;
– free them from the windscreen or
rear screen when they have not
been used for a long time.
4
A
To refit
To refit the wiper blade, proceed in re-
verse order to removal. Make sure that
the blade is correctly locked in position.
Rear screen wiper blade 4
Stalk in stop position (deactivated):
– lift the wiper arm 5;
– turn the blade horizontally 4 (move-
ment A) until it unclips;
– remove the blade by pulling it.
Before changing the rear
wiper blade, make sure the
stalk is in the stop position
(deactivated).
Risk of injury.
5
5.36
TOWING: breakdown (1/2)
Before towing, put the gearbox in neu-
tral, unlock the steering column and re-
lease the parking brake.
For vehicles fitted with an automatic
gearbox, if it is not possible to put the
gear lever in position N, please consult
an approved dealer.
Steering column unlocking
Insert the key into the ignition or, de-
pending on the vehicle, with the
RENAULT card on you, press the
engine start button for approximately
2 seconds.
Reposition the lever to neutral (posi-
tion N for vehicles fitted with an auto-
matic gearbox).
The steering column unlocks, the ac-
cessory functions are powered: you
can use the vehicle’s lights (direction
indicators, brake lights, etc.). At night
the vehicle must have its lights on.
Depending on the vehicle, once you
have finished towing, press the engine
start button twice (risk of running down
the battery).
The speed specified by current legis-
lation for towing must always be ob-
served. If your vehicle is the towing
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum
towing weight for your vehicle (refer to
the information on “Weights” in
Section 6).
Towing a vehicle with an
automatic gearbox
Transport the vehicle on a trailer or tow
it with the front wheels off the ground.
In exceptional circumstances, you
may tow it with all four wheels on the
ground, only in a forward gear, with the
gear in neutral position N over a maxi-
mum distance of 50 miles and not ex-
ceeding a speed of 15 mph (25 km/h).
When activated, in the event that the
lever is stuck in P, depress the brake
paddle. It is possible to free the lever
manually. To do this, unclip the base of
the lever, then insert a tool (rigid rod)
into the slot 2 (located on the left or
right of the lever depending on the ve-
hicle) and press simultaneously on the
button 1 to unlock the lever.
Contact an authorised dealer as soon
as possible.
2
1
5.37
TOWING : breakdown (2/2)
Only use the front 3 and rear 7 towing
points (never use the driveshafts or any
other part of the vehicle). These towing
points may only be used for pulling.
They must never be used for lifting the
vehicle directly or indirectly.
Access to towing points
Front towing point
Press zone A and keep depressed
while pulling zone B to open flap 4.
Rear towing point
Press zone C and keep depressed
while pulling zone D to open flap 6.
Tighten the towing hitch 5 fully: first
by hand until it stops then finish by lock-
ing it with the wheel brace.
Do not leave the tools unse-
cured inside the vehicle as
they may come loose under
braking.
Use the towing hitch 5 only (refer to the
information on “Tools” in Section 5).
B
A
C
D
– Use a rigid towing bar.
If a rope or cable is used
(where the law allows this),
the vehicle being towed
must be able to brake.
– A vehicle must not be towed if it is
not fit to be driven.
– Avoid accelerating or braking
suddenly when towing, as this
may result in damage being
caused to the vehicle.
– In all cases, it is advisable not to
exceed 15.5 mph (25 km/h).
When the engine is
stopped, steering and brak-
ing assistance are not op-
erational.
3
7
5
5
6
4
5.38
OPERATING FAULTS (1/7)
Using the RENAULT card POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
The RENAULT card does not lock or
unlock the doors.
Card battery is flat. Replace the battery. You can still lock/
unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the
information on “Locking/unlocking the
doors” in Section 1 and “Starting/Stopping
the engine” in Section 2).
Use of appliances operating on the
same frequency as the card (mobile
phone, etc.).
Stop using the equipment or use the in-
tegrated key (refer to the information on
“Locking, unlocking the opening elements”
in Section 1).
Vehicle located in a high electromag-
netic radiation zone.
Vehicle battery flat.
Use the key integrated in the card (refer to
the information on “Locking, unlocking the
opening elements” in Section 1).
The message “Place card close to
START button” appears on the instru-
ment panel.
Hold the start button card close until the
instrument panel message stops being dis-
played, then press the same button within
2 seconds of the message going out.
The vehicle is started. With the engine running, the card’s locking/
unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the ig-
nition.
5.39
The following advice will enable you to carry out quick, temporary repairs. For safety reasons you should always contact
an approved dealer as soon as possible.
Using the remote control POSSIBLE CAUSES ACTION REQUIRED
The remote control does not lock or
unlock the doors.
The remote control battery is flat. Use the emergency key.
Use of appliances operating on the same
frequency as the remote control (mobile
phone, etc.).
Stop using the devices or use the key.
Vehicle located in a high electromagnetic
radiation zone.
Discharged battery.
Replace the battery. You can still lock/
unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the
information on “Locking/unlocking the
doors” in Section 1 and “Starting/Stopping
the engine” in Section 2).
The vehicle is started. With the engine running, the key’s locking/
unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the
ignition.
OPERATING FAULTS (2/7)
5.40
OPERATING FAULTS (3/7)
The starter is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
The instrument panel indicator lights
are weak or fail to light up and the
starter does not turn.
Battery terminals not tight, bat-
tery terminals disconnected or
oxidised.
Retighten or reconnect the terminals, or clean them
if they are oxidised.
Discharged battery or not opera-
tional.
Connect another battery to the faulty battery. Refer
to the paragraph “Battery: troubleshooting” in sec-
tion 5 or replace the battery if necessary.
Do not push the vehicle if the steering column is
locked.
Faulty circuit. Consult an approved dealer.
The engine will not start. Starting conditions are not ful-
filled.
Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Section 2.
The RENAULT “hands-free” card
does not work.
Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Section 2.
The engine cannot be switched off. Card not detected. Press and hold the start button.
Electronic fault. Press the start button quickly five times.
The steering column remains locked. Steering wheel locked. Move the steering wheel while pressing the engine
start button (please refer to Section 2 “Starting, stop-
ping the engine”).
Faulty circuit. Consult an approved dealer.
5.41
OPERATING FAULTS (4/7)
On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
Vibrations. Tyres not inflated to correct pres-
sures, incorrectly balanced or dam-
aged.
Check the tyre pressures: if this is not the
problem, have them checked by an ap-
proved Dealer.
White smoke from the exhaust. In the diesel version, this is not neces-
sarily a fault. Smoke may be caused
by particle filter regeneration.
Refer to the information on “Special fea-
tures of diesel versions” in Section 2.
Smoke under the bonnet. Short-circuit or cooling system leak. Stop, switch off the ignition, stand away
from the vehicle and contact an approved
dealer.
The oil pressure warning light comes
on:
while cornering or braking The level is too low. Top up the engine oil level (refer to the in-
formation on “Engine oil level: topping up/
filling” in Section 4).
is slow to go out or remains lit
under acceleration
Loss of oil pressure. Stop the vehicle and contact an approved
Dealer.
5.42
OPERATING FAULTS (5/7)
On the road POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
Steering becomes heavy. Assistance overheating. Consult an approved dealer.
The engine is overheating. The cool-
ant temperature indicator is in the
warning zone and warning light
® comes on.
Engine cooling fan not working. Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
contact an approved dealer.
Coolant leaks. Check the coolant reservoir: it should con-
tain fluid. If there is no coolant, consult an
authorised dealer as soon as possible.
Coolant boiling in the coolant reser-
voir.
Mechanical fault: damaged cylinder
head gasket.
Stop the engine.
Contact an approved dealer.
Radiator: If there is a significant lack of coolant, remember that it must never be topped up using cold coolant while
the engine is very warm. After any procedure on the vehicle which has involved even partial draining of the cooling
system, it must be refilled with a new mixture prepared in the correct proportions. Reminder: only products approved
by our Technical Department may be used for this purpose.
5.43
OPERATING FAULTS (6/7)
Electrical equipment POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
The wipers do not work. Wiper blades stuck. Free the blades before using the wipers.
Faulty electrical circuit. Consult an approved dealer.
Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse, refer to the information
on “Fuses”.
The wiper does not stop. Faulty electrical controls. Consult an approved dealer.
Direction indicators flashing more
quickly.
Blown bulb. See information on “Headlights: changing
bulbs” in section 5.
The direction indicators do not work. Faulty electrical circuit or control. Consult an approved dealer.
Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse, refer to the information
on “Fuses”.
The lights do not come on or go off. Faulty electrical circuit or control. Consult an approved dealer.
Fuse damaged. Replace the fuse or have it replaced; refer
to the information in the “Fuses” section.
5.44
OPERATING FAULTS (7/7)
Electrical equipment POSSIBLE CAUSES WHAT TO DO
Traces of condensation in the lights. Traces of condensation may be a nat-
ural phenomenon caused by varia-
tions in temperature.
In this case, the traces will disappear
slowly once the lights are switched
on.
The front seat belt reminder light
comes on when the seat belts are
fastened.
An object is stuck between the floor
and the seat and is disrupting the op-
eration of the sensor.
Remove all objects from underneath the
front seats.
6.1
Section 6: Technical specifications
Vehicle identification plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2
Engine identification plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
Towing weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7
Replacement parts and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Service sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
Anticorrosion check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
6.2
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATES
A
B
A
9
7
8
10
5
1
2
3
4
6
The information shown on the ve-
hicle identification plate should be
quoted on all correspondence or
orders.
The presence and location of the in-
formation depends on the vehicle.
Vehicle identification plate A
1 Manufacturer name.
2 EC design number or approval
number.
3 Identification number.
Depending on the vehicle, this
information is also given on
marking B.
4 MMAC (Maximum permissible
all-up weight).
5 MTR (Gross train weight: vehicle
fully loaded, with trailer).
6 MMTA (Maximum Permissible
Weight) front axle.
7 MMTA rear axle.
8 Reserved for related or additional
entries.
9 Diesel exhaust emissions.
10 Paint reference (colour code).
6.3
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION PLATES
Please quote the information on the
engine plate or label A in all corre-
spondence or orders.
(Location varies depending on engine)
1 Engine type.
2 Engine suffix.
3 Engine number.
A
1 2
3
A
A
A
6.4
DIMENSIONS (in metres) (1/2)
0,934 2,734 0,739 1,600
4,407
1,653*
1,597
2,128
* Unladen
Short chassis
6.5
DIMENSIONS (in metres) (2/2)
0,934 2,804 0,897 1,600
4,635
1,660*
1,597
2,128
* Unladen
Long chassis
6.6
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Versions 1.2 TCe 1.5 dCi 1.6 dCi
Engine type
(see engine plate)
H5F Turbo K9K R9M
Cubic capacity (cc) 1197 1 461 1598
Type of fuel
Octane rating
It is essential that you use unleaded
petrol of the octane rating stated on
the label inside the fuel filler flap.
Diesel
The label located in the fuel filler flap indicates authorised fuels.
Spark plugs Only use the spark plugs specified for
your vehicle’s engine.
The type should be marked on a label
affixed inside the engine compart-
ment. If it is not then contact an ap-
proved Dealer.
Fitting spark plugs which are not
to specification may damage the
engine.
–
6.7
WEIGHTS (in kg)
The weights indicated are for a basic vehicle without options: they may vary depending on your vehicle’s equipment.
Consult an approved Dealer.
Maximum Permissible All-Up Weight (MMAC)
Gross Train Weight (MTR)
Maximum permissible all-up weight (MMTA)
Weights are indicated on the vehicle identification plate (refer
to the information on “Vehicle identification plates” in Section 6)
Braked Trailer Weight* found by calculating: MTR - MMAC
Unbraked Trailer Weight* 750
Permissible nose weight* 75
Permissible load on the roof with the carrying device 80 (including the carrying device)
* Towing weight (towing a caravan, boat, etc.)
Towing is prohibited when the MTR - MMAC calculation is equal to zero, or when the MTR is equal to zero (or is not listed) on the
identification plate.
– It is important to comply with the towing weights, governed by local legislation in each country and, in particular, laid down in
the Road Traffic Regulations. Contact an approved Dealer about any towing equipment.
– For vehicles fitted with a trailer, the total train weight (vehicle + trailer) must never be exceeded. However, for vehicles with
a long chassis, the following conditions are permitted:
– rear axle MMTA exceeded by no more than 15%,
– maximum MMAC exceeded by no more than 10% or 100 kg (whichever is reached first).
In either case, the maximum speed of the vehicle and trailer must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressures must
be increased by 0.2 bar (3 PSI).
– The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude. You need to reduce the total train weight by 10% at an al-
titude of 1,000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1,000 metres thereafter.
Weight transfer
If the Maximum Authorised Mass of the vehicle has not been reached, up to 350 kg can be transferred to the braked trailer, within
the limits of the Gross Train Weight.
6.8
Original parts are based on strict specifications and are subject to highly-specialised tests. Therefore, they are of at least the same
level of quality as the parts fitted originally.
If you always fit genuine replacement parts to your vehicle, you will ensure that it performs well. Furthermore, repairs carried out
within the manufacturer’s Network using original parts are guaranteed according to the conditions set out on the reverse of the
repair order.
REPLACEMENT PARTS AND REPAIRS
6.9
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
VIN: ..................................................................................
SERVICE SHEETS (1/6)
6.10
SERVICE SHEETS (2/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.11
SERVICE SHEETS (3/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.12
SERVICE SHEETS (4/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.13
SERVICE SHEETS (5/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.14
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date: Miles (Km): Invoice number: Comments/miscellaneous
Type of operation: Stamp
Service □
....................................... □
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □ Not OK* □
*See specific page
SERVICE SHEETS (6/6)
6.15
ANTICORROSION CHECK (1/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.16
ANTICORROSION CHECK (2/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.17
ANTICORROSION CHECK (3/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.18
ANTICORROSION CHECK (4/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.19
ANTICORROSION CHECK (5/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.20
ANTICORROSION CHECK (6/6)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
7.1
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (1/6)
A
ABS .......................................................................2.35 → 2.39
accessories........................................................................ 5.33
accessories socket ................................................... 3.22, 3.37
adaptive cruise control...........................................2.74 → 2.81
additional methods of restraint .....................1.32 → 1.35, 1.38
side protection ............................................................. 1.37
to the rear seat belts ........................................1.32 → 1.36
adjusting your driving position ........................................... 1.28
advice on antipollution ....................................................... 2.30
air bag....................................................................1.32 → 1.38
activating the front passenger air bags ........................ 1.61
deactivating the front passenger air bags .................... 1.59
air conditioning ...............................................3.6 → 3.13, 3.19
A
air vent (Hybrid Assist).............................................. 3.44, 3.49
A
air vents ...................................................................... 3.4 – 3.5
anti-corrosion check ..............................................6.15 → 6.20
anti-corrosion protection .................................................... 4.14
anti-lock braking system: ABS ...............................2.35 → 2.39
antipollution
advice .......................................................................... 2.30
armrest:
front .............................................................................. 3.32
ashtray ............................................................................... 3.37
assisted parking...............................2.82 → 2.86, 2.89 → 2.92
automatic gearbox (use) ........................................2.93 → 2.95
automatic gearbox selector lever...........................2.93 → 2.95
B
battery..................................................................... 4.10 – 4.11
troubleshooting ................................................. 5.29 – 5.30
battery (remote control) ..................................................... 5.32
blind spot warning signal .......................................2.55 → 2.58
blind spot: warning signal ......................................2.55 → 2.58
bonnet......................................................................... 4.2 – 4.3
brake fluid ............................................................................ 4.8
bulbs
changing ..........................................................5.17 → 5.23
C
catalytic converter................................................... 2.12 – 2.13
central door locking ...............1.2 – 1.3, 1.5, 1.12 → 1.15, 1.18
changing a bulb .....................................................5.17 → 5.23
changing a wheel.................................................... 5.12 – 5.13
changing gear ...............................................2.20, 2.93 → 2.95
child restraint/seat .............................1.39 – 1.40, 1.42 → 1.58
child safety..................1.6, 1.9, 1.39 – 1.40, 1.42 → 1.58, 3.23
child seats..........................................1.39 – 1.40, 1.42 → 1.58
children .......................................................... 1.39 – 1.40, 1.40
children (safety) ................................................... 1.6, 1.9, 3.23
cigar lighter ........................................................................ 3.37
cleaning:
inside the vehicle .............................................. 4.16 – 4.17
clock .................................................................................. 1.90
closing the doors ...................................................1.13 → 1.17
control instruments ................................................. 1.78 – 1.79
controls ..................................................................1.62 → 1.65
coolant ................................................................................. 4.7
courtesy light .....................................3.26 – 3.27, 5.24 → 5.26
courtesy mirrors ................................................................. 3.28
cruise control .........................................................2.67 → 2.73
cruise control-speed limiter....................................2.67 → 2.73
customised vehicle settings ................................... 1.88 – 1.89
customising the vehicle settings ............................ 1.88 – 1.89
D
dashboard..............................................................1.62 → 1.65
daytime running lights........................................................ 1.98
7.2
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (2/6)
deadlocking the doors ................................................ 1.5, 1.12
demisting
rear screen ...........................................................3.6 → 3.8
windscreen ...........................................................3.6 → 3.8
dimensions ................................................................. 6.4 – 6.5
display ..........................................................1.66 → 1.77, 3.21
doors......................................................................1.16 → 1.18
doors/tailgate .............................................................. 1.4, 1.12
driver assistance........ 2.35 → 2.39, 2.47 → 2.61, 2.64 → 2.92
driver’s position .....................................................1.62 → 1.71
driving ....... 2.2 → 2.7, 2.12 – 2.13, 2.20 → 2.29, 2.32 → 2.39,
2.67 → 2.86, 2.93 → 2.95
driving aids ......................................2.35 → 2.39, 2.47 → 2.92
driving position
settings ........................................................................ 1.28
driving recommendations ......................................2.24 → 2.29
E
ECO driving ...........................................................2.24 → 2.29
ECO mode ......................................................................... 2.27
electric beam height adjustment ......................... 1.100 – 1.101
electric windows ..................................................... 3.23 – 3.24
electronic parking brake ........................................2.21 → 2.23
electronic stability control: ESC .............................2.35 → 2.39
emergency active braking......................................2.40 → 2.46
emergency brake assist.........................................2.35 → 2.39
emergency braking ................................................2.35 → 2.39
emergency key ........................................................... 1.6 – 1.7
emergency spare wheel ............................................5.2 → 5.4
E
energy consumption/recovery indicator .................2.17 → 2.19
E
engine
technical specifications .................................................. 6.6
engine oil ...................................................................4.4 → 4.6
engine oil level ............................................................ 4.5 – 4.6
engine specifications ........................................................... 6.6
engine start/stop button .............................................2.5 → 2.7
environment ....................................................................... 2.31
ESC: electronic stability control .............................2.35 → 2.39
external temperature ......................................................... 1.90
F
fatigue detection warning........................................ 2.62 – 2.63
fatigue detector ....................................................... 2.62 – 2.63
F
faults
operating faults ................................................5.38 → 5.44
filter
air filter ........................................................................... 4.9
diesel filter ...................................................................... 4.9
oil filter ........................................................................... 4.9
passenger compartment filter ........................................ 4.9
fittings ....................................................................3.29 → 3.36
fixed sunroof ...................................................................... 3.25
front passenger air bag deactivation ................................. 1.59
front seat
driver’s position memory .............................................. 1.27
front seat adjustment .............................................1.20
→ 1.22
front seats
adjustment .......................................................1.20 → 1.22
with electric controls ......................................... 1.23 – 1.24
with manual controls .................................................... 1.20
fuel
advice on fuel economy ...................................2.24 → 2.29
capacity ...................................................................... 1.110
consumption ....................................................2.24 → 2.29
filling ............................................................. 1.110 → 1.112
grade ............................................................ 1.110 → 1.112
7.3
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (3/6)
fuel consumption ...................................................2.24 → 2.29
fuel economy .........................................................2.24 → 2.29
fuel level ............................................................................ 1.72
fuel repriming ....................................................................1.111
fuel tank
capacity ........................................................ 1.110 → 1.112
fuel tank capacity ............................................... 1.110 → 1.112
fuses ....................................................................... 5.27 – 5.28
G
gear lever........................................................................... 2.20
grab handle........................................................................ 3.32
H
handbrake............................................................... 2.20 – 2.21
hands-free telephone integrated control ................. 3.21 – 3.22
hazard warning lights signal ................................... 1.94 – 1.95
head-up display .....................................................1.72 → 1.77
headlight beam adjustment ............................................. 1.101
headlight flashers .............................................................. 1.94
headlight washer ............................................................. 1.106
headrest............................................................................. 3.38
heating and air conditioning system .................3.6 → 3.8, 3.19
heating system ...............................................3.6 → 3.13, 3.19
Hill Start Assist.......................................................2.35 → 2.39
horn ................................................................................... 1.94
horn:
flash ............................................................................. 1.94
sounding the horn ........................................................ 1.94
hubcap tool ..............................................................5.9 → 5.11
Hybrid Assist ......................1.69, 2.14 → 2.19, 3.44, 3.49, 5.28
Hybrid Assist system .........1.69, 2.14 → 2.19, 3.44, 3.49, 5.28
I
ignition switch ...................................................................... 2.3
indicators ....................................................... 1.94, 5.17 – 5.18
indicators:
direction indicators .............................................. 1.94, 5.19
exterior temperature indicator ...................................... 1.90
instrument panel ..............................................1.66 → 1.79
instrument panel ...........................................1.66 → 1.87, 1.95
instrument panel messages...................................1.80 → 1.87
interior trim
maintenance ..................................................... 4.16 – 4.17
Isofix ......................................................................1.53 → 1.58
J
jack ..........................................................................5.9 → 5.11
K
keys ...........................................................................1.2 → 1.5
L
lane departure warning ..........................................2.47 → 2.54
L
lane keeping: assistance .......................................2.51 → 2.54
L
levels:
brake fluid ...................................................................... 4.8
coolant ........................................................................... 4.7
engine oil ....................................................................... 4.4
windscreen washer reservoir ......................................... 4.9
lifting the vehicle
changing a wheel .............................................. 5.12 – 5.13
lighting:
exterior ....................................................1.7, 1.95 → 1.101
instrument panel .......................................................... 1.95
interior ..........................................3.26 – 3.27, 5.24 → 5.26
lights
adjustment ................................................................. 1.101
7.4
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (4/6)
changing bulbs .................................................. 5.17 – 5.18
front ................................................................... 5.17 – 5.18
lights:
adjusting .................................................................... 1.101
brake lights .................................................................. 5.19
dipped beam headlights ........................... 1.95, 5.17 – 5.18
direction indicators ..................................1.94, 5.17 → 5.19
fog lights ........................................................... 1.100, 5.19
hazard warning ............................................................ 1.94
main beam headlights ..................... 1.96, 1.98, 5.17 – 5.18
number plate lights ...................................................... 5.23
reversing lights ............................................................. 5.19
side lights ............................................................ 1.95, 5.19
locking the doors ........................1.4, 1.6 → 1.12, 1.16 → 1.18
luggage compartment cover .............................................. 3.47
luggage retaining net .............................................. 3.52 – 3.53
M
maintenance ...................................................................... 2.30
maintenance:
bodywork .......................................................... 4.14 – 4.15
interior trim ........................................................ 4.16 – 4.17
mechanical .........................................4.2 – 4.3, 6.9 → 6.14
manual air conditioning..............................................3.6 → 3.8
map reading lights .................................................. 3.26 – 3.27
menu for customising the vehicle settings .............. 1.88 – 1.89
methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...1.36 → 1.38
mulitfunction display ..............................................1.72 → 1.77
multifunction screen...............................................1.72 → 1.77
multimedia (equipment) .......................................... 3.21 – 3.22
multimedia equipment ............................................ 3.21 – 3.22
Multi-Sense................................................................. 3.2 – 3.3
N
navigation ............................................................... 3.21 – 3.22
navigation system ................................................... 3.21 – 3.22
O
oil change ..................................................................... 4.4, 4.6
opening the doors ..................................................1.13 → 1.17
operating faults ......................................................5.38 → 5.44
overspeed warning .......................................1.72, 2.64 → 2.66
P
paintwork
maintenance ..................................................... 4.14 – 4.15
parking assistance: assisted parking 2.82 → 2.86, 2.89 → 2.92
parking distance control.........................................2.82 → 2.86
P
pedestrian detection ..............................................2.40 → 2.46
P
power-assisted steering..................................................... 1.91
puncture.................................................5.2 → 5.4, 5.9 → 5.13
R
radio........................................................................ 3.21 – 3.22
radio frequency remote control/key
use .......................................................................1.2 → 1.4
rear parcel shelf ............................................. 3.36, 3.46 – 3.47
rear screen de-icing/demisting .......................................... 3.13
rear seats
functions ..........................................................3.39 → 3.44
rear view camera .................................................... 2.87 – 2.88
rear view mirrors ..................................................... 1.92 – 1.93
remote control door locking
batteries ....................................................................... 5.32
remote control door locking unit ................................1.2 → 1.4
RENAULT ANTI-INTRUDER DEVICE (RAID) ................... 1.18
RENAULT card
battery .......................................................................... 5.31
use .....................................................................1.6 → 1.12
7.5
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (5/6)
RENAULT card battery ...................................................... 5.31
replacement parts ................................................................ 6.8
reverse gear
selecting ..................................................2.20, 2.93 → 2.95
reversing sensor ....................................................2.82 → 2.86
roof bars ............................................................................ 3.54
roof rack
roof bars ....................................................................... 3.54
running in .................................................................... 2.2 – 2.3
S
safety distance warning .........................................2.59 → 2.61
safety distances .....................................................2.59 → 2.61
screen
fold-away screen .......................................................... 1.74
navigation display .................................. 1.73, 3.21 – 3.22
navigation screen ..................................... 1.73, 3.21 – 3.22
screen wash/wipe ............................................... 1.108 – 1.109
seat belt pretensioners ..........................................1.32 → 1.35
seat belts ................................1.28 → 1.30, 1.32 → 1.35, 1.38
see-me-home lighting ........................................................ 1.99
service sheets..........................................................6.9 → 6.14
side indicator lights
changing bulbs ............................................................. 5.23
sign detection: overspeed warning ........................2.64 → 2.66
signals and lights .................................................1.95 → 1.101
special features of diesel versions..................................... 2.13
special features of petrol vehicles ..................................... 2.12
speed limiter ..........................................................2.67 → 2.69
starting the engine .....................................................2.3 → 2.7
steering wheel
adjustment ................................................................... 1.91
Stop & Start .............................................................2.8 → 2.11
Stop & Start function................................................2.8 → 2.11
stopping the engine ............................................................. 2.4
storage compartment.............................................3.29 → 3.36
storage compartments ..................................3.29 → 3.36, 3.48
sun blinds .......................................................................... 3.28
sun visor ............................................................................ 3.28
switching on the vehicle ignition ................................... 2.3, 2.6
T
tailgate .................................................. 3.45 – 3.46, 3.48, 3.50
tanks and reservoirs
brake fluid ...................................................................... 4.8
coolant ........................................................................... 4.7
tanks and reservoirs:
windscreen washer ........................................................ 4.9
technical specifications ..............................................6.4 → 6.8
telephone ................................................................ 3.21 – 3.22
temperature regulation ...................................3.9 → 3.13, 3.19
tool kit ......................................................................5.9 → 5.11
towing
breakdown ........................................................ 5.36 – 5.37
towing equipment .............................................. 3.50 – 3.51
towing a caravan ............................................. 3.50 – 3.51, 6.7
towing equipment
fitting ................................................................. 3.50 – 3.51
towing hitch............................................................. 5.36 – 5.37
towing rings .............................................................. 3.50, 3.53
towing weights ..................................................................... 6.7
traction control .......................................................2.35 → 2.39
transporting children ..........................1.39 – 1.40, 1.42 → 1.58
transporting objects
in the luggage compartment ........................................ 3.50
luggage net ....................................................... 3.52 – 3.53
trims ................................................................................... 5.10
trip computer and warning system...1.66 → 1.71, 1.78 → 1.87
tyre inflation kit...........................................................5.5 → 5.8
tyre pressure.............................2.32 → 2.34, 4.12 – 4.13, 5.15
tyre pressure monitor.............................................2.32 → 2.34
tyre pressures ...........................2.32 → 2.34, 4.12 – 4.13, 4.13
7.6
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (6/6)
tyres ....................2.29, 2.32 → 2.34, 4.12 – 4.13, 5.14 → 5.16
U
unlocking the doors ...............................................1.13 → 1.15
V
vehicle detection ....................................................2.40 → 2.46
V
ventilation .......................................................3.6 → 3.13, 3.19
W
warning buzzer ................................................ 1.16, 1.94, 1.98
warning lights...................................1.66 → 1.71, 1.78 → 1.87
washing .................................................................. 4.14 – 4.15
weights ................................................................................ 6.7
wheelbrace ..............................................................5.9 → 5.11
wheels (safety) ......................................................5.14 → 5.16
windscreen de-icing/demisting .......................................... 3.13
windscreen washer ...................................... 1.108 – 1.109, 4.9
wiper blades ........................................................... 5.34 – 5.35
wipers
blades ............................................................... 5.34 – 5.35
A passion
for
performance
ELF, partner of
RENAULT recommends ELF
Partners in cutting-edge automotive technology, Elf and Renault combine their expertise on both
the racetrack and the city streets. This enduring partnership gives drivers a range of lubricants
perfectly suited to Renault cars. Lasting protection and optimum performance for your engine –
guaranteed. Whether changing the oil or simply topping up, to find the approved ELF lubricant
best suited to your vehicle, ask your Renault dealer for a recommendation or consult your vehi-
cle maintenance handbook.
www.lubricants.elf.com
A brand from
2016-Elf-ENG.indd 1
18/05/2016 14:20
RENAULT S.A.S. SOCIÉTÉ PAR ACTIONS SIMPLIFIÉE AU CAPITAL DE 533 941 113 € / 13-15, QUAI LE GALLO
92100 BOULOGNE-BILLANCOURT R.C.S. NANTERRE 780 129 987 — SIRET 780 129 987 03591 / TÉL. : 0810 40 50 60
NU 1183-2 – 99 91 009 19R – 08/2016 – Edition anglaise
à999100919Rêêûä SS
